Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 266

User Manual

Modular Protection System for Motors


Catalog Number 825-P

Important User Information


Because of the variety of uses for the products described in this publication, those responsible for the application and use of
this control equipment must satisfy themselves that all necessary steps have been taken to assure that each application and
use meets all performance and safety requirements, including any applicable laws, regulations, codes and standards.
The illustrations, charts, sample programs and layout examples shown in this guide are intended solely for purposes of
example. Since there are many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation
does not assume responsibility or liability (to include intellectual property liability) for actual use based upon the examples
shown in this publication.
Rockwell Automation publication SGI-1.1, Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of SolidState Control (available from your local Allen-Bradley distributor), describes some important differences between solidstate equipment and electromechanical devices that should be taken into consideration when applying products such as
those described in this publication.
Reproduction of the contents of this copyrighted publication, in whole or part, without written permission of
Rockwell Automation, is prohibited.
Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations:

WARNING: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment,
which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.
ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property
damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and recognize the consequence.
SHOCK HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that dangerous
voltage may be present.
BURN HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that surfaces may
reach dangerous temperatures.
IMPORTANT

Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.

DeviceNet and the DeviceNet logo are trademarks of the Open Device Vendors Association (ODVA).
Microsoft Windows is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation.

European Communities (EC)


Directive Compliance
If this product has the CE mark it is approved for installation within the European Union and European Economic Area
(EEA). It has been designed and tested to meet the following directives.

EMC Directives
This product is tested to meet the Council Directive 89/336/EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) by applying the
following standards, in whole:
EN 60947-4-1 Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear: Part 4: Contactors and Motor Starters - Section 1:
Electromechanical Contactors and Motor Starters
EN 60947-5-1 Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear: Part 5: Control Circuit Devices and Switching Elements Section 1: Electromechanical Control Circuit Devices
This product is intended for use in an industrial environment.

Low Voltage Directive


This product is tested to meet Council Directive 73/23/EEC Low Voltage as amended by 93/68/EEC by applying the
safety requirements of EN 60947-4-1 and EN 60947-5-1. For specific information required by EN 60947-4-1 and EN
60947-5-1, see the appropriate sections in this publication.

Notice
This product has been designed for environment A. Use of this product in environment B can cause unwanted
elctromagnetic disturbances in which case the user could be required to take adequate mitigation measures.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November

Table of Contents
Important User Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
European Communities (EC) Directive Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low Voltage Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preface

2
3
3
3

Manual Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Chapter 1
Introduction

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13
13
14
15

Chapter 2
Installation

Relay Placement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Relay Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear-Panel Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear-Panel Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Top-Panel Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC/Control Connection Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fail-Safe/Non-Fail-Safe Tripping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Converter Module Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Core Balance Current Transformer Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltage Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Full-Voltage Non-Reversing Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Full-Voltage Reversing Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Star-Delta Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Two-Speed Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Serviceability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Real-Time Clock Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
21
21
23
24
25
26
28
28
30
31
32
32

Chapter 3
Front Panel Operation

Front Panel Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Normal Front Panel Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Panel Automatic Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Panel Menus and Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Panel Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Panel Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View or Change Settings Using the Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Entry Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P November 2012

33
33
34
35
37
40
41
43

Table of Contents

Chapter 4
Hardware Commissioning

Connecting a Converter Module (MCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Adding an Optional I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding the Optional
Voltage Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding the Optional Communication Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing an Option Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

45
47
48
49
50

Chapter 5
Using MPS Explorer

Software Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection/Access Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save/Open
Configuration Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Button Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ANA (Test Analog Output). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MOT (Motor Operating Statistics) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SER (Serialized Events Recording) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STA (Relay Status) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SUM (Events Summary Report) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MET (Instantaneous Metering)
RTD (RTD/Thermal Metering). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TAR (Display Target Words) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Visualization/Trending. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Validate Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resetting/Restoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

51
51
52
52
53
53
54
54
55
55
56
57
58
59
61
62
63
63

Chapter 6
Configuring Protection & Logic Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Application Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Functions
Main Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identifier Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phase Rotation, Nominal Frequency Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Date Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current Transformer (CT) Configuration, Full Load Current
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltage Transformer (VT) Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overload (Thermal Model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Short Circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ground Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Undercurrent (Load Loss) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

66
66
67
67

68
69
69
70
74
75
77
77

Table of Contents

Current Imbalance/
Phase Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Protection Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Start Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Star-Delta (Wye-Delta) Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Start Inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Phase Reversal Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Speed Switch (Stalling
During Start) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Thermistor (PTC) Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
RTD-Based Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Voltage-Based Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Undervoltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Overvoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
VAR Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Underpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Power Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Load Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
I/O Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Analog Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Trip Inhibit (Block) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Output Relay Behavior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Timer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Front Panel Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Display Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
I/O Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Logic Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Stop/Trip Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Initiate Trip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Unlatch Trip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Start & Emergency Restart Logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Overload Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Chapter 7
Metering & Monitoring

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instantaneous Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thermal Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Measurement Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Operating Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

105
105
106
106
107
108

Chapter 8
Analyzing Events

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Event Summary Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Serialized Events Recording (SER) Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Table of Contents

SER Triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110


Example Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Chapter 9
825-PDN DeviceNet
Communication Card

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Shipping with the Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User-Supplied Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Node Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Hardware Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using RSNetWorx for DeviceNet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Explicit Messaging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up the MSG instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DeviceLogix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DeviceLogix Programming Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

113
115
116
116
116
116
117
118
119
121
122
124
125
129

Chapter 10
Modbus RTU Communications

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modbus Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modbus Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supported Modbus Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modbus Exception Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cyclical Redundancy Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
03h Read Holding Register Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
06h Preset Single Register Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10h Preset Multiple Registers Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
60h Read Parameter Information Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
61h Read Parameter Text Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
62h Read Enumeration Text Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7Dh Encapsulated Packet With Control Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7Eh NOP Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modbus Password Control and Parameter Modification. . . . . . . . . . . .
Modbus Serialized Events Recording Register Operation . . . . . . . . . . .
Modbus Load Profile Register Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

131
131
131
132
134
135
135
135
136
136
136
137
138
139
141
142
143
144
144
145
145

Chapter 11
Testing & Troubleshooting

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Commissioning Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Table of Contents

Selected Functional Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Periodic Tests (Routine Maintenance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Serviceability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Fuse Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Real-Time Clock (RTC) Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting DeviceNet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Device Backplane Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

151
155
157
158
158
159
160
160

Chapter 12
ASCII Serial Communications

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ASCII Serial Port Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connect Your PC to the Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure Your Terminal Emulation Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Terminal Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial Port Access Levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACC and 2AC (Level 1 or 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ANALOG (Level 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DATE (Level 1 or 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
METER (Level 1 or 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MOTOR (Level 1 or 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PASSWORD (Level 1 or 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QUIT (Level 1 or 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SER (Level 1 or 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SET (Level 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SHOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STATUS (Level 1 or 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STOP (Level 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STR (Level 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SUMMARY (Level 1 or 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TARGET (Level 1 or 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TIME (Level 1 or 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View or Change Settings with Front Panel Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

161
161
161
161
162
163
163
164
165
166
167
167
167
167
168
170
170
171
171
172
173
174
177
177
177
178
179
179

Chapter 13
Firmware Upgrade Instructions Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Required Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Upgrade Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Appendix A
Specifications

Electrical Ratings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187


Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Table of Contents

Main Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mechanical Ratings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RTD Scanner Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Metering Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Primary Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
825-CBCT Core Balance Current Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DeviceNet Communication Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

187
188
189
189
190
190
190
190
191
191
192

Appendix B
Parameter List

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Appendix C
Relay Word Bits

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Appendix D
ASCII Port Relay Command
Summary

ASCII Port Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Appendix E
DeviceNet Information

10

Electronic Data Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Product Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DeviceNet Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identity Object - CLASS CODE 0x0001. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Router - CLASS CODE 0x0002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DeviceNet Object - CLASS CODE 0x0003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assembly Object - CLASS CODE 0x0004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Custom Parameter Based Input (Produced) Assembly
Instance 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Input (Produced) Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Output (Consumed) Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection Object - CLASS CODE 0x0005 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discreet Input Point Object - CLASS CODE 0x0008. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discreet Output Point Object - CLASS CODE 0x0009 . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discrete Output Point Object Special Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter Object - CLASS CODE 0x000F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter Object - CLASS CODE 0x0010. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discrete Output Group Object - CLASS CODE 0x001E. . . . . . . . . . .
Control Supervisor Object - CLASS CODE 0x0029 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acknowledge Handler Object - CLASS CODE 0x002b . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overload Object - CLASS CODE 0x002c. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DeviceNet Interface Object - CLASS CODE 0x00B4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

242
242
242
243
244
244
245
246
247
250
251
254
255
256
257
258
259
261
261
262
262

Preface

Manual Overview

The 825-P Modular Protection System User Manual describes common aspects
of motor relay application and use. It includes the necessary information to
install, set, test, and operate the relay and more detailed information about
settings and commands. The chapter descriptions are as follows:
Preface
Describes the manual organization and conventions used to present
information.
Chapter 1: Introduction
Describes the basic features and functions of the 825-P.
Chapter 2: Installation
Describes how to mount and wire the 825-P; illustrates wiring connections
for various applications.
Chapter 3: Front Panel Operation
Explains features and use of the front panel, including front-panel
command menu, default displays, and automatic messages.
Chapter 4: Hardware Commissioning
Describes how to install and commission the various hardware options for
the 825-P.
Chapter 5: Using MPS Explorer
Describes how to use MPS Explorer software to read diagnostic
information and configure the 825-P.
Chapter 6: Configuring Protection & Logic Functions
Describes the operating characteristic of each protection element and
explains how to calculate their settings; describes contact output logic.
Chapter 7: Metering & Monitoring
Describes the operation of each metering function; describes the
monitoring functions.
Chapter 8: Analyzing Events
Describes front-panel LED operation, trip-type front-panel messages,
event summary data, standard event reports, and Serialized Events
Recording (SER) report.
Chapter 9: 825-PDN DeviceNet Communication Card
Describes the communication features supported by the 825-P DeviceNet
option card.
Chapter 10: Modbus RTU Communications
This chapter describes the communications features supported by the 825P Modbus RTU Option Card.
Chapter 11: Testing & Troubleshooting
Describes protection element test procedures, relay self-test, and relay
troubleshooting.
Chapter 12: ASCII Serial Communications
Describes the serial port commands supported by the 825-P.
Chapter 13: Firmware Upgrade Instructions
Describes the process to upgrade the firmware for the 825-P.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

11

Preface

Appendix A: Specifications
Provides detailed specification and certification information for all
components of the 825-P Modular Protection System.
Appendix B: Parameter List
Describes the available parameters for the 825-P.
Appendix C: Relay Word Bits
Lists and describes the Relay Word bits (e.g., real-time status of relay I/O,
protection functions).
Appendix D: ASCII Port Relay Command Summary
Briefly describes the serial port commands that are fully described in
Chapter 12: ASCII Serial Communications.
Appendix E: DeviceNet Information
Describes the details of the features supported by the 825-P DeviceNet
option card.

Conventions

Typographic Conventions
The primary ways to configure the 825-P are by using:
MPS Explorer configuration and monitoring software.
a command line interface on a PC terminal emulation window, such as
Microsoft HyperTerminal.
the front-panel menus and push buttons.

Examples
This instruction manual uses several example illustrations and instructions
to explain how to effectively operate the 825-P. These examples are for
demonstration purposes only. The firmware identification information or
settings values included in these examples may not necessarily match those
in the current version of your 825-P.

Example Description
STATUS Commands typed at a command line interface on a PC.
Enter Single keystroke on a PC keyboard.
Ctrl+D Multiple/combination keystroke on a PC keyboard.
Start > Settings PC dialog boxes and menu selections.
The > character indicates submenus.
CLOSE Relay front-panel push buttons.
ENABLE Relay front-panel or rear-panel labels.
MAIN > METER Relay front-panel LCD menus and relay responses.
The > character indicates submenus.

12

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter

Introduction

Overview

The 825-P Motor Relay is designed to protect three-phase motors. The basic
relay provides locked rotor, overload, unbalance, and short circuit protection.
Voltage-based and RTD-based protection is available as an option. All relay
models provide monitoring functions.
This manual contains the information for installing, setting, testing, operating,
and maintaining an 825-P. It is not necessary to review the entire manual to
perform specific tasks.
A Quick Start Guide, Publication 825-QS001, is also available. It will help to step
the first-time user through the device commissioning process.

Features

Standard Protection Features

Thermal Overload (thermal model)


PTC (positive temperature coefficient) Overtemperature
Undercurrent (Load Loss)
Current Imbalance and Phase Loss
Overcurrent (Load Jam)
Short Circuit
Ground Fault (Residual)
Ground Fault (Zero Sequence)
Motor Starting/Running
Protection Inhibit During Start
Start Motor Timer
Notching or Jogging Device
TCU (Thermal Capacity Utilization) Start Inhibit
Anti-Backspin Timer
Emergency Start
Two Speed Protection
Reduced Voltage Starting (Star-Delta)
Stall-Speed Switch
Frequency

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

13

Chapter 1

Introduction

Optional Protection Features


Voltage-Based Protection

Undervoltage
Overvoltage
Underpower
Reactive Overpower
Phase Reversal
Power Factor

RTD-Based Protection
Up to 12 RTDs can be monitored when an external 825-PR12D RTD Scanner is
used. There are separate trip and warn settings for each RTD.

Monitoring Features
The monitoring features of the 825-P are as follows:
Event summaries contain relay ID, date and time, trip cause, and current/
voltage magnitudes.
Serialized Events Recording (SER).
Motor running time since the last reset.
Start cycles since the last reset.
Emergency start cycles since the last reset.
A complete suite of accurate metering functions.

Options and Accessories

Options
The 825-P has the following options:
Voltage Option: four-wire wye or open-delta connected potential
transformers
Input/Output (I/O) Option: one 420 mA analog (transducer)
output, three additional control inputs, and four additional contact
outputs
Network communications options
DeviceNet
Modbus

14

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Introduction

Chapter 1

Accessories
Phase current inputs require one of the following external 825-MCM
converter modules:
Table 1 - Converter Module List
Description

Cat. No.

0.52.5 A Converter Module

825-MCM2

1.05.0 A Converter Module

825-MCM5

2.520 A Converter Module

825-MCM20

20180 A Converter Module

825-MCM180

160630 A Converter Module

825-MCM630

160630 A Converter Module

825-MCM630N

The ground fault current (zero sequence) feature requires an external 825-CBCT
Core Balance Current Transformer, or equivalent.
The following devices are required to add RTD protection:
An external RTD scanner Cat. No. 825-PR12D RTD. A fiber-optic cable
is not included with the 825-PR12D).
A simplex 62.5/125 m fiber-optic cable with ST connector for
connecting the external RTD scanner to the 825-P (e.g., part# 1570FCBLMM-SX-62-STST-2M from Ultra Spec Cable - http://store.ultraspec.us).

Applications

The 825-P can be used with the following across the line starter applications:
Low and medium voltage with 2 or 3 potential transformers
With or without phase current transformers
With or without zero-sequence core balance current transformer
With or without external RTD module
Reversing starter
Star-delta starting
Two-speed motors
Figure 1 shows across the line starting AC connections for the case where
external current transformers are not required. Refer to Chapter2: Installation
for additional applications and the related connection diagrams.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

15

Chapter 1

Introduction

Figure 1 - AC Connections Without CTs


L1

L2

L3

Converter Module
Cat. No. 825-MCM2
Cat. No. 825-MCM5
Cat. No. 825-MCM20
Cat. No. 825-MCM180
Cat. No. 825-MCM420
Cat. No. 825-MCM630N

A1
A2
1

825-MCM
2

M
3~

16

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

825-P

Chapter

Installation

Relay Placement

Proper placement of the 825-P Motor Relay helps make certain that you receive
years of trouble-free motor protection. Use the following guidelines for proper
physical installation of the 825-P.

Physical Location
You can mount the 825-P in a sheltered indoor environment (a building or an
enclosed cabinet) that does not exceed the temperature and humidity ratings
for the relay. The relay can be mounted indoors or in an outdoor (extended)
enclosure where the relay is protected against exposure to direct sunlight,
precipitation, and full wind pressure, but neither temperature nor humidity
are controlled.
Refer to Appendix:A Specifications for environmental ratings.

Relay Mounting
To flush mount the 825-P in a panel, cut a rectangular hole with the dimensions
shown in Figure 2.
Figure 2 - Relay Mounted In a Panel

18
(7. 6.0
32
)

Legend
mm
(in)
138.0
(5.43)

19
(7. 2.0
56
)

0
4. )
14 .67
(5

Mounting Panelmaximum thickness 6.5 mm


#8 x 1/2 inch mounting screw;
Torque specification = 0.9...1.3 N. m (8...12 Lb-in)
Gasket

147.4
(5.80)

20.8
(0.82)

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

17

Chapter 2

Installation

Rear-Panel Connections

Rear-Panel Diagram
The physical layout of the connectors on the rear-panel of a fully configured
825-P is shown in Figure 3.
Figure 3 - Rear-Panel Layout
Factory
Configured

Factory
Configured
E

L1

33

0.31 in
8.0 mm

DEVICENET

34
L2
43
L3

44

53

A1+

BK
BU
SH
WH
RD

A2-

24

IY22

CBCT

Y24

S1
S2

Y26
Y2157-0138

PGM
8

MSD

MAC ID

LSD

98

Y1-

4
2

96

96

Y12

0 = 125K
1 = 250K
2 = 500K

95

98

DATA
RATE

95

Y14

AUTO
BAUD

157-0136

Current Voltage Input Expansion


Input
Card
I/O

18

NONFAIL-SAFE

T1
T2

BUS
STATUS

Core Balance
Current Transformer

23

PTC

NETWORK
STATUS

I+

14

RX

63
64

13
RTD
MODULE

54

WIRE STRIP GUIDE

MCM / CWE

190-3011-01

FAIL-SAFE

Converter
Module
Input

Ground
Screw

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Communication
Card

Incoming
Temperature Power
Input

Installation

Chapter 2

Top-Panel Diagram
The input and output designations for the rear-panel connectors of a fully
configured 825-P are shown in Figure 4. This diagram is located on the top panel
of the relay.
Figure 4 - Top-Panel Input and Output Designations

See documentation for input voltage rating.

Power Connections
The power terminals on the rear panel (A1+ and A2-) must connect to
110240V AC or 110250V DC for the 825-PD and 2448V DC for the 825PZ. For complete power input specifications, see Appendix:A Specifications.
The power terminals are isolated from the chassis ground. Use 16 AWG
(1.5 mm2) size or heavier wire to connect to the POWER terminals. Connection
to external power must comply with IEC 947-1 and IEC 947-3. Place an external
switch, circuit breaker, or overcurrent device in the power leads for the 825-P;
this device must interrupt both the positive (A1+)and neutral (A2-) power leads.
The maximum current rating for the power disconnect circuit breaker or
overcurrent device (fuse) must be 20 A. Be sure to locate this device within 3.0 m
(9.8 ft.) of the relay.
Operational power is internally fused by power supply fuse. See Field
Serviceability on page31 for details. Be sure to use fuses that comply with
IEC 127-2.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

19

Chapter 2

Installation

I/O Diagram
A more functional representation of the control (I/O) connections are shown
in Figure 5.
Figure 5 - Control I/O Connections in Powered-Down State
110240V AC, 2448V DC
or 110250 V DC
24 or 120V AC/+V DC 24V AC/+V DC
6

#5

#4

#3

#2

Analog Out

#1

+/H
Y14 Y12

95

13

23

33

PTC

43

53

63

I+

T1

T2

RX

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

IN5

PS

825-P Relay

Aux1 Aux2 Aux3 Aux4 Aux5 Aux6


Alarm

Trip

A1 Y26 Y24 Y22

F/O Cable
to RTD Scanner

/N

Y1

Y2

A2
2

98

96

14

24

34

44

54

64

BK

24 or 120V AC/V DC

BU

SH

WH

RD

V CAN_L Drain CAN_H V +

24V AC/V DC
DeviceNet Cable

See Table 44 for control function assignment to the input IN1 and IN2. Connect the appropriate external contacts (#1 and #2) to the
inputs.
Inputs IN3, IN4, and IN5 are available when an optional I/O extension card is present. 825-PIOD inputs are rated 120V AC/DC. 825-PIOR
inputs are rated 24V AC/DC.
See Table 42 for mapping protection elements to the Trip output. See Figure 7 and Figure 16 for typical control circuit connections.
See Table 43 for mapping protection and/or control elements to the Aux outputs. Outputs Aux3 through Aux6 are available when an
optional I/O extension card is present.
Analog Output is available when an optional I/O extension card is present.
You can connect up to six thermistors (PTC) in series. See Table 2 for PTC cable requirements.
Use up to 500 meter long Simplex 62.5/125 mm fiber-optic cable (ST/ST).
Available when an optional DeviceNet Communications Protocol Card is present.

20

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Installation

Chapter 2

Table 2 shows the maximum cable lengths for the PTC connections.
Table 2 - PTC Cable Requirements

AC/Control Connection
Diagrams

Wire Size,
Twisted Pair,
AWG No.

Maximum Length
(meters) Shielded Cable

Maximum Length
(meters)
Unshielded Cable

20

200

100

18

300

100

17

400

100

16

600

100

14

1000

100

This section describes fail-safe versus non-fail-safe tripping, describes voltage


connections, and provides the AC and DC wiring diagrams for the following
applications:
Across the line starting
Star-delta starting
Two-speed motor

Fail-Safe/Non-Fail-Safe Tripping
The Trip relay can be configured for Fail-Safe or Non-Fail-Safe operation by way
of the Relay Behavior settings group discussed in Output Relay Behavior on
page92. The Trip relay output is a Form C contact consisting of a common
terminal, a normally open (N.O.) terminal and a normally closed (N.C.)
terminal. The terminals require different contact designations based on whether
the Trip relay is configured for Fail-Safe or Non-Fail-Safe operation.
The proper contact designations for Fail-Safe and Non-Fail-Safe configurations
are identified in Figure 6. Be certain to apply the appropriate marking strip to the
terminal plug corresponding to the configuration of the relay's trip output.
The 825-P provides fail-safe and non-fail-safe trip modes (setting selectable) for
the Trip and Aux (auxiliary) contacts. The following occurs in fail-safe mode:
The Trip relay coil is energized continuously.
When the 825-P generates a trip signal, the Trip relay coil is de-energized.
The Trip relay coil is also de-energized if the 825-P input power is removed
or if the 825-P fails (self-test status is FAIL).

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

21

Chapter 2

Installation

Figure 6 - TRIP Relay Output Contact Configurations

95

95

96

98

98

TRIP

Non-Fail-Safe Tripping

TRIP

Fail-Safe Tripping ( )

96

NOTE: Contact numbering changes are based on the TRIP Fail-Safe Setting.

Figure 7 shows fail-safe and non-fail-safe wiring methods to control breakers and
contactors. Keep in mind that the Fail-Safe (Electrically Held) and Non-FailSafe labels apply to the whole row that they are aligned with and not just to the
single diagram that they are next to.
Figure 7 - TRIP Contact Fail-Safe and Non-Fail-Safe Options

Contactor

Circuit Breaker
Fail-Safe
(Electrically Held)

STOP
95
98

CR

START
95

TC Breaker Trip Coil

96

52A

CR Contactor Coil

Non-Fail-Safe

STOP
95
98

START

CR

95

TC Breaker Trip Coil


52A

NOTE:

22

96

CR Contactor Coil

Contact numbering changes are based on TRIP Fail-Safe setting.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Installation

Chapter 2

Converter Module Connection


Figure 8 - Converter Module Connection
4 M Connection Cable
(supplied with MCM)

MCM

NOTE:

The 825-P relay is not EMC-tested for converter module connecting cable lengths greater
than the 4-meter cable that is supplied.

Figure 9 - Converter Module Dimensions


e3

b1

d3
b
b2

d1

e2

c1

e2

d2
a

Cat. No. 825-MCM2825-MCM180

Cat. No. 825-MCM420

Cat. No. 825-MCM630N

Dimensions
Cat. No.

c1

d1

d2

d3

e1

e2

825-MCM2, -MCM5, -MCM20

120

85

102

66

5.3

5.3

100

55

2x2.5 mm2

38.5

825-MCM180

120

102

72

5.3

5.3

100

55

825-MCM420

155

145

156

118

6.3

6.3

135

88

11

M10

48

825-MCM630N

155

145

177

118

6.3

6.3

135

88

11

M10

48

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

38.5

b1

b2

75

110/118

23

Chapter 2

Installation

Core Balance Current Transformer Connections


Figure 10 - Core Balance Current Transformer Connections
Z

E
MCM/CWE

C
DEVICENET

L2

BK
BU
SH
WH
RD

L3
N

0.31 in
8.0 mm

A1+

A213
RTD
MODULE

14
23

RX

24
PTC

T2

PGM
8

CBCT

Y1-

0 = 125K
1 = 250K
2= 500K

98

Y12

DATA
RATE

96

96

S1
S2

95

98

Y14

157-0138

Figure 11 - 825-CBCT Dimensions [mm (in)]


+

35
(1.38)

150
(5.91)

9.0
(0.35)

200
(7.87)
175
(0.69)

110
(4.33)

80
(3.15)
175
(6.90)

24

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

190-3011-01

95

FAIL-SAFE

T1

BUS
STATUS
NETWORK
STATUS

NONFAIL-SAFE

825-CBCT
Ground Fault Sensor
(or customer-supplied
equivalent)

S1
S2

L1

Installation

Chapter 2

Voltage Connections
With the Voltage Inputs option, the three-phase voltages can be directly
connected for voltages under 300VL-L , wye-wye VT connected or open-delta
VT connected. Figure 12 shows the three methods of connecting three-phase
voltages.
Figure 12 - Voltage Connections
Direct Connection (Xfmr Connection = Wye)
L1

L2

L3

F1, F2, and F3 are fuses.


F1

L1

F2

L2

F3

L3

825-P

Wye-Wye VT Connection (Xfmr Connection = Wye)


L1

L2

L3
F1

L1

F2

L2

F3

L3

825-P

Open-Delta VT Connection (Xfmr Connection = Delta)


L1

L2

L3
F1

L1

L2

F3

825-P
L3

The recommended fuse is the Bussman KTK - 1/10, 1/10 ampere Limitron fuse,
or its equivalent.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

25

Chapter 2

Installation

Full-Voltage Non-Reversing Starter


Figure 13 - AC Connections without CBCTs
L1

L2

L3

Converter Module
Cat. No. 825-MCM2
Cat. No. 825-MCM5
Cat. No. 825-MCM20
Cat. No. 825-MCM180
Cat. No. 825-MCM420
Cat. No. 825-MCM630N

A1
A2
1

825-MCM
2

825-P

M
3~

Figure 14 - AC Connections with CBCT


L1

L2

L3

Converter Module
825-MCM2
825-MCM5
825-MCM20
825-MCM180
825-MCM420
825-MCM630N

825-MCM
2

825-P
S1

T2

S2

T2 Core Balance Transformer


Current ratio of core balance current transformer: 1...2000:1
Output from core balance current transformer: 0...500mA

M
3~

Figure 15 - AC Connections with Phase CTs and CBCT


L1

L2

L3

Converter Module
Cat. No. 825-MCM2
Cat. No. 825-MCM5
Cat. No. 825-MCM20

825-MCM
2

T1

T2

825-P
S1

S2

M
3~

26

T1 Primary Current Transformer:


...A/5 A or ...A/1 A
T2 Core Balance Transformer
Current ratio of core balance current transformer: 1...2000:1
Output from core balance current transformer: 0...500 mA

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Installation

Chapter 2

Figure 16 - Control Connections for a Full-voltage Non-reversing Starter


K1
S1
S0
H1
TR
H3
AUX1

S0 [

S1 [

K1
95

A1

TR

AUX1
96

98

A2

13

825-P

Contactor
On push button
Off push button
Indicator "Contactor Closed"
Trip relay
Indicator "Alarm/Warning"
Alarm relay
NOTE: For AUX1 to work as an
alarm/warning indicator,
it must be mapped to the
"Warning" function bit.

14

A1
H1

K1

H3

A2

NOTE:

For AUX1 to work as an alarm/warning indicator, it must be mapped to the Warning


function bit.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

27

Chapter 2

Installation

Full-Voltage Reversing Starter


Full-voltage reversing starter motor applications require the following settings:
TWO SPEED ENABLE = Y (Yes)
IN1 = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 (Speed 2)
FVR PHASING = the phase (A, B, or C) that is not changing
CT RATIO-2nd = CT RATIO
MOTOR FLA-2nd = MOTOR FLA
MOTOR LRC-2nd = MOTOR LRC
MOTOR LRT-2nd = LOCKED ROTOR TIME
ACCEL FACT-2nd = ACCEL FACTOR
RUN ST TC-2nd = RUN STATE TIME K

Figure 17 - AC Connections for Full-voltage Reversing Starter


L1

L2

L3

L N

825-MCM
2

825-P

Converter Module
825-MCM2
825-MCM5
825-MCM20
825-MCM180
825-MCM420
825-MCM630N

6
24V AC/V DC
+ -

(I)

(II)
Y12 Y1M
3~

825-P

Star-Delta Starting
The star-delta application in the following figures requires the following auxiliary
relay settings:
AUX#H = 0001000 (Star), AUX# FAIL-SAFE = N
AUX#H = 0000100 (Delta), AUX# FAIL-SAFE = N

28

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Installation

Chapter 2

Figure 18 - AC Connections for Star-Delta Starting


L1 L2

A1 1

L3

K1

A1 1

K2D
A2

A1 1

A2

A2

825-P

825-MCM
U1

K3Y

V1 W1
M
3~

U1 Converter Module
Cat. No. 825-MCM2
Cat. No. 825-MCM5
Cat. No. 825-MCM20
Cat. No. 825-MCM180
Cat. No. 825-MCM420
Cat. No. 825-MCM630N

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

29

Chapter 2

Installation

Figure 19 - Control Connections for Star-Delta Starting


S0

S1

K1

95

A1
AUX1

TR

53

Contactor
On push button
Off push button
Indicator
"Contactor closed"
TR Main relay
H3 Indicator "Alarm/Warning"
AUX1 Alarm relay
NOTE: For AUX1 to work
as an alarm/warning
indicator, it must be mapped
to the "Warning" function bit.
K1
S1
S0
H1

96

63

98

A2

H1

H3

13
825-P
14

825-P AUX5 AUX6


54

64

A1

A1

A1

A2

A2

A2

K3

K2
D

NOTE:

K1
H

For AUX1 to work as an alarm/warning indicator, it must be mapped to the Warning


function bit.

Two-Speed Motor
The two-speed motor applications in the following figures require the following
input setting: IN1 = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 (SPEED2)
Figure 20 - AC Connections for a Two-Speed Motor
L1

L2

L3

3
5
825-MCM
2
4
6

825-P

24 V AC/V DC

(I)

(II)
Y12 Y1
825-P
M
3~

30

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Installation

Chapter 2

Figure 21 - AC Connections for a Two-Speed Motor with Primary CTs


L1

L2

L1

L3
... A / 1 (5) A
I

K1

L2

L3

... A / 1 (5) A
II

K2
24 V AC/V DC

M
3~

Y1 Y12
825-P

K2
(I)

(II)

825-MCM

K1

825-P

ATTENTION: Disconnect or de-energize all external connections before opening this


device. Contact with hazardous voltages and currents inside this device can cause
electrical shock that can lead to injury or death. Equipment components are sensitive to
electrostatic discharge (ESD). Undetectable permanent damage can result if you do not
use proper ESD procedures. Ground yourself, your work surface, and this equipment,
before removing any cover from this equipment. If your facility is not equipped to work
with these components, contact Rockwell Automation about returning this device and
related Rockwell Automation equipment for service.

Field Serviceability

The 825-P firmware can be upgraded in the field; refer to Chapter 13:
Firmware Upgrade Instructions. You know when a self-test failure has occurred
by monitoring the front-panel messages. By using the metering functions, you
know if the analog front-end (not monitored by relay self-test) is functional.
Refer to Chapter 11: Testing and Troubleshooting for detailed testing and
troubleshooting information. The only two components that can be replaced in
the field are the power supply fuse and the real-time clock battery. A lithium
battery powers the clock (date and time) if the external power source is lost or
removed. The battery retains the thermal memory for the thermal overload
function when the power source is lost or removed. The battery is a 3V lithium
coin cell, Rayovac BR2335 or equivalent. At room temperature (25C), the
battery operates nominally for ten years at rated load. When the relay is powered
from an external source, the battery experiences a low self-discharge rate. Thus,
battery life can extend well beyond ten years. The battery cannot be recharged.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

31

Chapter 2

Installation

Fuse Replacement
To replace the Power Supply fuse, do the following:
1. De-energize the relay.
2. Remove the eight rear-panel screws, the ground screw, and the relay rearpanel.
3. Remove the Slot A printed circuit board.
4. Locate the fuse on the board.
5. Remove the fuse from the fuse holder.
6. Replace the fuse with a BUSS 2A/250V ABC (ceramic) or equivalent.
7. Insert the printed circuit board into Slot A.
8. Reinstall the relay rear-panel and ground screw, and then energize the relay.

Real-Time Clock Battery Replacement


To replace the real-time clock battery, do the following:
1. De-energize the relay.
2. Remove the eight rear-panel screws, the ground screw, and the
relay rear-panel.
3. Remove the Slot B printed circuit board.
4. Locate the battery clip (holder) on the board.
5. Remove the battery from beneath the clip.
6. Properly dispose of the old battery.
7. Install the new battery with the positive (+) side facing up.
8. Insert the printed circuit board into Slot B.
9. Reinstall the relay rear-panel and ground screw, and then energize the relay.
10. Set the relay date and time.

32

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter

Front Panel Operation

Front Panel Layout

The 825-P Relay front-panel interface consists of two LEDs, an LCD display,
a seven-button keypad, and an EIA-232 serial port connector. The front-panel
layout is shown in Figure 22.
Figure 22 - Relay Front Panel
LCD Display
Displays real-time and historic
information as well as relay setting
menus.

EIA-232 Serial Port

Allows quick access to all relay data,


control, and setting functions using
a PC, serial cable, and software.
PORT F

Enable LED
Illuminates when relay is operational.

ENABLE
TRIP
TEST/RESET

Trip LED
Flashes to indicate alarm conditions
and illuminates solid to inidcate trip.
ESC

Test/Reset
When pushed, will trip-test the relay
OR resets the trip.

Escape
Reactivates the LCD Display
back-lighting and backs out of the
current menu or display.

Normal Front Panel Display

Arrows
Navigates through
menus or data lists
shown in the LCD Display.

Enter
Allows movement from
the default display to
the main menu.

In normal operation, the relay ENABLE LED is illuminated and the LCD
display screen is on. The LCD screen rotates displays showing each screen for
about two seconds before moving to the next. The default rotating display screens
include Unit ID Line 1, Unit ID Line 2, line currents, and voltages (if available).
Enable the relay to add display messages as noted in the Display Enable settings
in Table 41.
Figure 23 - Default Display Screen
825-P Modular
Prot. System

Use the UNIT ID LINE 1 (RID) and UNIT ID LINE 2 (TID) settings
described in Identifier Settings to change the contents of the information shown
in Figure 23.
If the front panel was in Access Level 2, it automatically returns to the default
display when the display times out. For more information, see Table 40.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

33

Chapter 3

Front Panel Operation

The display changes for the following relay conditions in the order of precedence
(see Table 3):
Status failure
Trip condition time to trip (if under 10000 seconds)
Warning
Lockout start request
Emergency start in progress

Front Panel Automatic


Messages

The relay displays automatic messages under the conditions described in Table 3.
Table 3 - Front Panel Automatic Messages
Condition

Front Panel Message

Relay detecting any failure

Displays the type of latest failure (see Chapter 11).

Relay trip has occurred

Displays the type or cause of the trip. (See the list of the types of Trip
messages under the heading Front Panel Messages.

Motor running overload

Displays the predicted time to thermal element trip in seconds.

Relay alarm condition has


occurred

Displays the type of alarm (see Alarm or Warning Messages).

When a start is requested during Displays the type of lockout condition (see Lockout Messages).
a lockout condition
Control input set to
disable protection

Displays Protect Disabled By Control Input.

During emergency start

Displays Emergency Start.

Front Panel Messages


Each time the relay trips, it automatically displays a front-panel message and the
Trip LED illuminates. If a trip occurs during a critical alarm status condition, the
Trip LED flashes (see Self-Tests on page 156).

Trip message
The Trip message describes the type of trip that occurred:

34

Overload Trip
Locked Rotor Trip
Undercurrent Trip
Jam Trip
Current Imbalance Trip
Short Circuit Trip
Ground Fault Trip
Speed Switch Trip

Undervoltage Trip
Overvoltage Trip
Underpower Trip
Power Factor Trip
Reactive Power Trip
Phase Reversal Trip
Underfrequency Trip
Overfrequency Trip

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

RTD Trip
PTC Trip
Start Time Trip
RTD Fail Trip
PTC Fail Trip
Comm Idle Loss Trip
Remote Trip
Comm Fail Trip

Front Panel Operation

Chapter 3

Alarm or Warning Messages


Each time the relay is in a warning condition with the Trip LED flashing, the
front-panel displays the corresponding warning message.
The Warning message describes the type of warning that is occurring:

Overload Warning
Undercurrent Warning
Jam Warning
Current Imbalance Warning
Ground Fault Warning
Short Circuit Warning
Speed Switch Warning

Undervoltage Warning
Overvoltage Warning
Underpower Warning
Power Factor Warning
Reactive Power Warning
Underfrequency Warning
Overfrequency Warning

RTD Warning
RTD Failure
MCM/CWE Failure
PTC Failure
Comm. Loss Warning
Comm. Idle Warning
Comm. Fault Warning

The relay automatically displays a thermal time to trip for an impending thermal
overload. See Figure 24.
Figure 24 - Trip Message Sample
Thermal Trip In
1234 sec

Lockout Messages

Front Panel Menus


and Operations

TCU Lockout
Start/Hr Lockout
Min Off Lockout
Restart Lockout

The 825-P front panel gives you access to most of the information that the relay
measures and stores. You can also use the front panel controls to view or modify
relay settings.
All of the front panel functions are accessible using the seven-button keypad
and LCD display. Use the keypad to maneuver within the front panels menu
structure, as described in detail throughout the remainder of this section.
Table 4 describes the function of each push button.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

35

Chapter 3

Front Panel Operation

Table 4 - Front Panel Push Button Functions


Push Button

Function
UpArrow

Move up within a menu or data list.


While editing a setting value, increase the value of the underlined
digit.

DownArrow

Move down within a menu or data list. While editing a setting value,
decrease the value of the underlined digit.

LeftArrow

Move the cursor to the left.


While viewing event data, move to data for a newer event.

RightArrow

Move the cursor to the right.


While viewing Event data, move to the data for an older event.

Esc

Re-activate the front panel display back-lighting.


Back out from the current menu or display.

Enter

Move from the default display to the main menu.


Select the menu item at the cursor.
Select the displayed setting to edit the setting.

Trip/Reset

The Test/Reset push button has two functions if it has not been
disabled.
Pressing the Test/Reset push button resets the Trip LED and the Trip
output of the relay. If a trip condition is active, the front-panel
message displays the following:
Reset Failed
TRIP is active
To test the trip output, press the Test/Reset push button for longer
than two seconds.
The Test/Reset push button is disabled when Disable settings are
active

ESC

TEST/RESET

The Test/Reset push button has two functions if it has not been disabled.
Pressing the Test/Reset push button resets the Trip LED and the Trip output
of the relay. If a trip condition is active, the front-panel message displays the
following:
Reset Failed
TRIP is active
To test the trip output, press the Test/Reset push button for longer than two
seconds.
The Test/Reset push button is disabled when Disable settings are active (see
Table 44).

36

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Front Panel Operation

Chapter 3

Front Panel Security


Front Panel Access Levels
The relay front panel typically operates at Access Level 1 and allows any user to
view relay measurements and settings. Some activities, such as editing settings and
controlling output contacts, are restricted to those operators who know the relay
Access Level 2 password when enabled. The factory default setting for the Access
Level 2 password is DISABLED, which provides unrestricted access.
In the figures that follow, restricted activities are marked with the padlock
symbol, shown in Figure 25.
Figure 25 - Access Level Security Padlock Symbol

Before you can perform a front panel menu activity that is marked with the
padlock symbol, you must enter the correct Access Level 2 password. After
you have correctly entered the password, you can perform other Access Level 2
activities without re-entering the password.

Access Level 2 Password Entry


When you try to perform an Access Level 2 activity, the relay determines whether
you have entered the correct Access Level 2 password since the front panel
inactivity timer expired or since the Reset Access Lvl command has been
executed from the Main Menu. If you have not, the relay displays the screen
shown in the Password Entry screen shown in Figure 26 for you to enter the
password.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

37

Chapter 3

Front Panel Operation

Figure 26 - Password Entry Screen


Password=
Del Clr Accept
ABCDEFGH
IJKLMNOP
QRSTUVWX
YZ......
abcdefgh
ijklmnop
qrstuvwx
yz......
01234567
89......
!"#$%^'(
)*+,-./:
;<=>?@[\
]^_`{|}~

To Enter Password
Perform these steps to enter the correct password to issue an Access Level 2
function or to change the Access Level 2 password.
1. Press the DownArrow push button twice. A blinking cursor appears in the
first character position of the password and an underline appears beneath
the character (letter) A in the lower line of the display.
2. Underline the first character of the password by moving through the
characters shown in Figure 26. Use the LeftArrow and RightArrow push
buttons to move the underline to the left and right and the UpArrow and
DownArrow push buttons to move to other character rows.
3. With the correct first character underlined, press the Enter push button.
The first character appears in the upper line of the display and the blinking
cursor moves one character to the right.
4. Using the arrow push buttons, continue to move within the character table
and select each of the characters to build the Access Level 2 password.
NOTE:

The factory default Access Level 2 password is DISABLED.

5. With the correct Access Level 2 password visible in the upper line of the
display, use the up and right arrow to select Accept.
6. Press the Enter push button to accept the password shown in the upper
line of the display.
7. If the password is correct, the relay displays the requested setting.
8. Press the Enter push button to continue your task.
38

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Front Panel Operation

Chapter 3

9. If the password is incorrect, the relay displays the message Invalid


Password.
10. Press the Enter push button to return to your previous task.

To Correct Entry Errors


To correct password entries, do the following:
1. If the cursor in the upper line of the display is blinking, press the Esc push
button once.
2. Use the arrow push buttons to move the underline cursor to the position
of the incorrect letter.
3. With the incorrect letter underlined, press the DownArrow push button.
The blinking cursor reappears in the upper line of the display and the
underline cursor appears in the lower line.
Add New Character. To substitute a new character in the location of
the blinking cursor, use arrow push buttons to move the underline
cursor to the location of the character that you want in the character
table; then press Enter.
Delete Character. To delete the character at the blinking cursor, use the
arrow push buttons to move the underline cursor to Del and press the
Enter push button.
Clear Password. To clear the entire password and start over, use the
arrow push buttons to move the underline cursor to Clr and press the
Enter push button.
4. Continue making corrections until the password appears in the upper line
of the display.
5. With the correct Access Level 2 password visible in the upper line of the
display, use the arrows to move the underline cursor to ACCEPT.
6. Press the Enter push button to accept the password shown in the upper
line of the display.
7. If the password is correct, the relay continues the task.
8. Press enter to continue your task. If the password was incorrect, the relay
displays the message Invalid Password.
9. Press the Enter push button to return to your password entry.
10. Repeat Steps 19 until you enter the correct password.
11. When you have completed changing settings, use the Main Menu
command Reset Access Lvl (described in the next section) to reset the
Access Level to Level 1 so that unauthorized access is prevented. (The
access level will remain at Level 2 until the front panel backlight times
out or the Reset Access Lvl command is executed.)

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

39

Chapter 3

Front Panel Operation

All access to information and relay settings through the front panel starts at the
relay main menu. The remainder of this section describes the use of the main and
lower level menus.

Front Panel Main Menu


Main

Meter

Events

Motor Monitor

Instant

Dsp
Event

Mtr Use

L1 Curr
L1 Angle
L2 Curr
L2 Angle
L3 Curr
L3 Angle
GF Cur (8)
GF-CB An
GR (Res)
GF Ang
Avg Curr
Mtr Load
Curr Imb
Freq

Reset
Event

Rset Date
Rset Time
Run Time
Stop Time
Time run
# of starts
E starts

Thermal
Mtr Load
TCU
Thrm Trip
T to Rset

Yes/No

Trip Alarm

Set/
Show

Relay
Main Settings
Overload Set

Yes/No

Status

Ph Rot
Rated Freq
Date
Ph CT
OL Enable
Reset MD
Reset Lvl
Serv Fact

Mtr FLA
2-speed
CT-2nd
Mtr FLA-2
Mtr LRC
LRT
Accl Fact
Rn ST TC

FVR Ph XFMR
Cr B CT
Ph VT
Line Volt

Mtr LRC-2
Mtr LRT-2
Accl Fact-2
ST TC-2nd

Reset
TCU

Port

Reset
Energies

Restore/
Reset
Reboot Access Level

IO Assign DTE Time Passwrd

Port F Port 4

OL Warn Lvl
St Inh Lvl
Speed Com Int
Stop Cool T
Data
Bits Protocol
OL Biasing

Trip Rly
Aux 1
Aux 2
In 1
In 2

Date
Time

New PW

GF-Res Settings

Parity Speed
Trip Lvl Trip Dly Warn Lvl Warn Dly Stop Bits Parity
Trip Lvl Trip Dly Warn Lvl Warn Dly Port TO Slave ID
Hndshke
Trip Lvl Trip Dly Warn Lvl Warn Dly

Jam Settings

Trip Lvl Trip Dly Warn Lvl Warn Dly

Under Current Set

Trip Level Trip Delay Warn Lvl Warn Dly Start Inh

Current Imb Set

Trip Level Trip Delay Warn Lvl Warn Dly

Prot. Disable

Prot Inh OL Inh

Start Monitor

St Mtr Time

Star-Delta Set

Star-Del En Max Star T

Start Inhibit Set

Start/Hr Min Off T Rstrt blk T

Phase Rev Set

Ph Rv En

Speed SW Set

Trip Dly Warn Dly

PTC Settings

PTC En PTC Rst

RTD Settings

RTD En RTD Rst RTD* Loc RTD* Type RTD* Trip RTD* Warn Wdng Trip Bear Trip TMP Bias

Freq Settings

F1 Trip Lvl F1 Trip Dly F1 Wrn Lvl F1 Wrn Dly F2 Trip Lvl F2 Trip Dly F2 Wrn Lvl F2 Wrn Dly

Short Ckt Set


GF-CB Settings

Overload
Undercur
Jam
Curr Imb
Shrt Ckt
GF
Speed SW
Undrfreq
Overfreq
Lckd Rot
Ph Rever
St Timer
Rem Trip
Other
Total
Reset Stats

40

Targets

Load Control Set Load Ctrl Ctrl Up Ctrl Low


I/O Settings

Analog O

Trip Inhibit

Curr Imb Jam GF Short Ckt Undercurr Start Inh PTC RTD

Relay Behavior

Trip Fl-Sfe Aux1 Fl-Sfe Aux2 Fl-Sfe Aux3 Fl-Sfe Aux4 Fl-Sfe Aux5 Fl-Sfe Aux6 Fl-Sfe

Timer Settings

On Dly T1 Off Dly T1 On Dly T2 Off Dly T2

Front Panel Set

LCD Time LCD Cntrst

Display Enable

Time/Date Gr Curr Curr Imb Freq TCU RTD Temp Volt Imb Power

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Front Panel Operation

View or Change Settings


Using the Front Panel

Chapter 3

Enter the front panel menu by pressing the Esc button. It displays the following
message:
MAIN
Meter

Scroll through the menu by using the DownArrow and UpArrow push buttons
until the display shows the appropriate menu.
Targets
SET/SHOW

The cursor (underline) indicates the selected menu item. Press Enter to navigate
into the submenu.
Scroll through the parameters by using the DownArrow and UpArrow buttons.
SET/SHOW
RELAY

Press the Enter button to change a parameter setting. Use the UpArrow and
DownArrow and the LeftArrow and RightArrow push buttons to modify the
parameter. After changing the parameter, press the Esc push button until the
following message appears:
Save Changes?
Yes No

Select and enter the appropriate command by pressing the Enter push button.
Select Yes to save the settings changes and No to discard the changes.
NOTE:

Each 825-P is shipped with default factory settings. Calculate the settings for your motor
to ensure secure and dependable protection.

Figure 27 shows a front-panel menu navigation example to enter the Phase


Rotation (ABC, ACB) setting.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

41

Chapter 3

Front Panel Operation

Figure 27 - Front Panel Setting Entry Example

Main Menu
Meter
Events

Press to move
within the list.

Motor Monitor
Targets
Set/Show
Status

Press to select an
underlined menu item.

Reset TCU

Set/Show Menu
RELAY
ESC

PORT

IO ASSIGN
Press to return
to the previous list. DATE/TIME
PASSWORD

RELAY Menu
ESC

Main Settings
Overload Set

Front Panel Set


Display Enable

Main Settings Menu


UNIT ID LN 1
ESC

UNIT ID LN 2
PH ROTATION
RATED FREQ

LINE VOLTAGE
XFMR CON

PHASE
ROTATION Menu
ESC

42

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

PHROT=ABC

Front Panel Operation

Setting Entry Error Messages

Chapter 3

As you enter relay settings, the relay checks the setting entered against the
settings own range as published on the relay setting sheet. If an entered setting
falls outside its range, the relay immediately responds with the message Out of
Range and prompts you to reenter the setting.
In addition to the immediate range check, several of the settings have
interdependency checks with other settings. The relay checks setting
interdependencies after you answer Y to the Save Settings? prompt, but before
the settings are stored. If any one of these checks fail, the relay issues one of the
error messages shown in the Table 5, and returns you to the settings list for a
correction.

Table 5 - Setting Interdependency Error Messages


Error Message

Setting /Function

Correct the Condition

50NnP must be within xx.xx and yy.yy


(n = 1 or 2)

Ground FaultCore
Balance

Modify the 50N1P or 50N2P setting to satisfy the requirement shown


in the error message.

50PnP must be less than xx.xx


(n = 1 or 2)

Short Circuit

Modify the 50P1P or 50P2P setting to satisfy the requirement shown


in the error message.

CTRn,FLAn Setting Combination Out of Range


(n = 1 or 2)

Main Settings

Modify the CTRn or FLAn setting to satisfy:

LRAn must be less than: xxx


(n = 1 or 2)

Overload

Modify the LRA1 or LRA2 setting to satisfy the requirement shown in


the error message.

Minimum STOP COOL TIME: xxxx min

Overload

Modify the COOLTIME setting to satisfy the requirement shown in the


error message.

Only one ambient RTD allowed


(n = 112)

RTD

Modify the RTD location setting (RTDnLOC) to satisfy the requirement


shown in the error message.

PTR Setting Out of Range

Main Settings

Modify VNOM or PTR setting to satisfy:

0.5 (FLAn/CTRn) 2.5 when MCM2 is used


1.0 (FLAn/CTRn) 5.0 when MCM5 is used
2.5 (FLAn/CTRn) 20 when MCM20 is used
20 (FLAn/CTRn) 180 when MCM180 is used
160 (FLAn/CTRn) 630 when MCM630 is used

100 (VNOM/PTR) 250

Warning: Duplicate Assignment

Input Mapping

Warning: Verify 50PnP is lower than MCM/CWE saturation current. Short Circuit
Save Changes (Y/N)?
(n = 1 or 2)
Warning: Verify LRAn is lower than MCM/CWE saturation current
Save Changes (Y/N)?
(n = 1 or 2)

Overload

Modify INn assignment ensuring that input is not assigned to more


than one element.
Answer Y if you are using MCM630N.
If you are using MCM630, you must modify the 50P1P or 50P2P
setting below its saturation current to ensure proper protection.
Answer Y if you are using MCM630N.
If you are using MCM630, you must modify the LRA1 or LRA2 setting
below its saturation current to ensure proper protection.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

43

Chapter 3

44

Front Panel Operation

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter

Hardware Commissioning

All hardware that is added to the 825-P must be installed and commissioned
individually. Listed below are the processes required to commission an 825-P
for a specific Converter Module, Optional I/O Module, Optional Voltage
Module, and Optional Communication Module.

Connecting a Converter
Module (MCM)

Connect the MCM module to 825-P


Apply power to the 825-P base relay
The following fault will be displayed:

STATUS FAIL
MCM/CWE Error
Navigate to Main > Status to view the Status display
The display will show the following message:

Confirm Hardware
Config

(Enter)

Press the Enter key to confirm that you want this hardware change

Confirm Config?
Yes No

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

45

Chapter 4

Hardware Commissioning

Select Yes to confirm the new hardware configuration, and the display
will show:

Config Accepted
Enter to Reboot
Press Enter to reboot the relay.
If existing configuration parameters are not proper for the specific
hardware configuration, then the following message will be displayed

Setting Mismatch
Adjust Settings
To correct the configuration parameters reset the relay to the default
parameters for the specific hardware configuration by navigating to Main>Reboot/Restore and select Restore Defaults in which the following
display will appear:

Restore Default
No Yes
Select Yes and the relay will reboot. With the updated configuration
parameters, the display will show the following error message:

STATUS FAIL
MCM/CWE Error
Navigate to Main > Status to view the Status display
The display will show the following message:

Confirm Hardware
Config

46

(Enter)

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Hardware Commissioning

Chapter 4

Press the Enter key to confirm that you want this hardware change

Confirm Config?
Yes No
Select Yes to confirm the new hardware configuration, and the display
will show:

Config Accepted
Enter to Reboot
Press Enter to Reboot the relay

Adding an Optional I/O Card

Remove control power from the relay, and remove the back cover
Add the optional I/O card into Slot D in the 825-P
Replace the cover and reapply control power to the relay
The 825-P will detect a hardware configuration change and display the
following message:

STATUS Fail
I/O Card Failure
Navigate to Main > Status to view the Status display
The display will show the following message:

Confirm Hardware
Config

(Enter)

Press the Enter key to confirm that you want this hardware change

Confirm Config?
Yes No

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

47

Chapter 4

Hardware Commissioning

Select Yes to confirm the new hardware configuration, and the display
will show:

Config Accepted
Enter to Reboot
Press Enter to reboot the relay

Adding the Optional


Voltage Card

Remove control power from the relay, and remove the back cover
Add the optional Voltage Card into Slot E in the 825-P
Replace the cover and reapply control power to the relay
The 825-P will detect a hardware configuration change and display the
following message:

STATUS Fail
Volt Card Fail
Navigate to Main > Status to view the Status display
The display will show the following message:

Confirm Hardware
Config

(Enter)

Press the Enter key to confirm that you want this hardware change

Confirm Config?
Yes No
Select Yes to confirm the new hardware configuration, and the display
will show:

Config Accepted
Enter to Reboot
Press Enter to reboot the relay
48

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Hardware Commissioning

Adding the Optional


Communication Card

Chapter 4

Remove control power from the relay, and remove the back cover
Add the optional communication card into Slot C in the 825-P
Replace the cover and reapply control power to the relay
Navigate to Main > Status to view the Status display
If the display shows the following message:

Confirm Hardware
Config

(Enter)

Press the Enter key to confirm that you want this hardware change

Confirm Config?
Yes No
Select Yes to confirm the new hardware configuration, and the display
will show:

Config Accepted
Enter to Reboot
Press Enter to reboot the relay
If there is an address conflict on the internal communication bus, the
display show the following message:

COMMFLT
Warning
To correct this conflict, navigate to Main > Set/Show > Port > Port 4
and select the parameter named Modbus Slave ID
Change the Modbus Slave ID to the value of 247
Press the ESC key, and the display will show the following message:

Save Changes?
Yes No
Select Yes to resolve the address conflict
Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

49

Chapter 4

Hardware Commissioning

Removing an Option Card

Remove control power from the relay, and remove the back cover
Remove the option card from the 825-P
Replace the cover and reapply control power to the relay
The display will show the following message to indicate that something is
different with the hardware configuration:

STATUS FAIL
xxxxxx Card Fail
Navigate to Main > Status to view the Status display
The display will show the following message:

Confirm Hardware
Config

(Enter)

Press the Enter key to confirm that you want this hardware change

Confirm Config?
Yes No
Select Yes to confirm the new hardware configuration, and the display
will show:

Config Accepted
Enter to Reboot
Press Enter to reboot the relay

50

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter

Using MPS Explorer

Software Overview

The MPS Explorer software allows users to access settings and data on Modular
Protection Systems (MPS) for motors. The 825-P connects to a PC via the serial
communications port (Port F) on the front face where settings can be configured.
Real-time monitoring of metering data and diagnostic information can also be
viewed on the front face. The data that is collected can be exported for analysis
in other software, such as Microsoft Excel. Graphical output, ranging from pilot
lights to gauges and time plots, can be modified for a specific application.
MPS Explorer software is available for download at:
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Circuit-and-Load-Protection/MotorProtection/Bulletin-825P#/tab4
To install the software, download the Windows Installer Package file (.msi) and
follow the prompts to the MPS Explorer Wizard.

Communications Settings

The communications settings can be accessed from the MPS > Communications
Settings menu. When configuring these settings, it is critical that they match the
settings on the front panel of the 825-P for Port-F.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

51

Chapter 5

Using MPS Explorer

Connection/Access Level

Once the communication settings have been configured and the 825-P is
connected via the serial port, connection can be established. To connect to the
825-P, navigate to the MPS > Connect or click the . If the settings are correct,
the access level dialog box will appear.
Access Level 0: There is no access to MPS data. It is used to manually log off
and prevent settings from being changed or monitored.
Access Level 1: This level allows only monitoring of parameter and metering
values.
Access Level 2: Full access to the 825-P, including the configuration of parameter
values.
To change access levels, select the appropriate button. The access levels must
be changed in ascending order. To obtain access to Level 2, access must first be
obtained in Levels 0 and 1. If the application requires the use of a password, it can
be typed into the text box and click the Send Password button. Once the first
successful connection has been established, the software will display the device
status, by default.

To disconnect from the 825-P relay, use the


button or navigate to MPS >
Disconnect. Disconnecting from the 825-P will result in the access level being
downgraded to 0. MPS Explorer will automatically detect the absence of the
825-P when the program is closed, but it is recommended that the user
disconnect before removing power or physically disconnecting the relay.

Data Management

52

The user is able to change the parameters at any time, regardless of the connection
status. The settings can be saved and the file can be loaded on to replacement
components. There are two buttons on the toolbar that perform operations
pertaining to transfer of data and parameters. The software and the 825-P can
be synchronized by both buttons. The
button is used to Apply the
Configuration (Download) from the MPS Explorer software to the device,
while the
button is used to Get MPS Settings (Upload) the current hardware
settings from the device to the software. After the device has been connected to
MPS Explorer, the screen will indicate the status of each setting.
An active setting will be displayed in black, while an inactive setting will be
Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Using MPS Explorer

Chapter 5

grayed. When a change to an individual setting is made, an asterisk will appear


before the short name.

Save/Open
Configuration Files

The software allows the user to save configured parameter values to local disk
drives. This option can be used to backup configurations and reduce engineering
time when working with multiple relays all requiring similar settings.
To save the configuration to a local disk, click the
button or navigate to File >
Save Configuration. A dialog box will appear prompting the user to specify a
target location and name to save the file. To open a previously saved
configuration, click the
button or navigate to File > Open Configuration
File. The opened file will only display the parameters on the screen and will not
be changed on the device until they are downloaded.

Button Summary

MPS Explorer software incorporates a large number of functions displayed


on the toolbar.

Table 6 Symbol

Name

Description

Test relay analog current output

Configurable output with a specified percentage of the full analog


output current for a defined period of time

View motor operation statistics

Displays the operating statistics of the motor connected to the 825-P

View serialized events

Display, sort, and export the serialized event data

View relay self-test status

Display the status of the 825-P including option card and


DeviceNet status

View relay metering data

The instantaneous metering screen allows collection and export


of data in real time and is independent of the main screen

View event summary report

Displays the last five major events

View relay thermal metering data

Displays thermal data from up to 12 locations

View relay word information

Displays the status of relay elements

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

53

Chapter 5

Using MPS Explorer

ANA (Test Analog Output)


The Test Analog Output function will output a specified percentage of the
full analog output current for a defined period of time. Enter the percentage
and duration, click the Test button and monitor the analog output for the
expected current.

MOT (Motor Operating Statistics)


The Motor Operating Statistics function displays the operating statistics of the
motor that is connected to the 825-P relay. Newer firmware versions (R107+)
display the trip and alarm accumulators.

54

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Using MPS Explorer

Chapter 5

SER (Serialized Events Recording)


The Serialized Events Recording function displays the ongoing events that can
be sorted by date, time, element or state.

Dialog buttons function as follows:


Exit:

Close the dialog window. All data that was acquired will be lost.

Refresh:

Acquire a list of events based upon the contents of the range edit boxes.

Box 1

Box 2

Data Acquired

Empty

Empty

All Events

Number

Number

Events between and including number limits

Number

Empty

Events starting with the number entered through most recent event

Date

Date

Events between and including date limits

Date

Empty

Events starting with the date entered up to the most recent event

Clear Device:

Physically clear the serialized events from the 825-P. This cannot be recovered.

Export:

CSV: Export the data in the list to a Comma Separated Value file.

STA (Relay Status)


The Relay Status function displays the hardware status including the option cards
and DeviceNet status. If the hardware configuration has been modified, the user

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

55

Chapter 5

Using MPS Explorer

is able to confirm or ignore the changes from this screen. The relay will reboot
when the hardware changes are confirmed.

SUM (Events Summary Report)


The Event Summary Report function displays the five most recent events

56

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Using MPS Explorer

Chapter 5

MET (Instantaneous Metering)


RTD (RTD/Thermal Metering)
The Instantaneous and Thermal Metering functions display the collection
and export data in real time. The user is able to configure the parameters that
are displayed for both instantaneous and thermal metering.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

57

Chapter 5

Using MPS Explorer

TAR (Display Target Words)


The Display Target Words function shows the status of relay elements and is
independent from the main window. To view the full bit description, place the
cursor over any masked heading.

Dialog buttons function as follows:


Start:

Times

Interval

Action

Empty

Empty

Poll Row # as fast as possible until Stop button is clicked

Empty

Number

Poll Row #at every time interval until Stop button is clicked

Number

Empty

Poll Row # as fast as possible until Times number of sets have


been acquired

Number

Number

Poll Row # at every time interval until Times number of sets


have been acquired

Stop:

Stop collecting data at any time

Show all:

Display every row sequentially one time

Clear:

Clear the list contents on the screen

Exit:

Hide the data acquisition screen. If data is being acquired via the Start button, it will stop
automatically when the window is hidden.

Export CSV:

Export the data in the list to a Comma Separated Value file (.csv) for external analysis. If
rows are selected a prompt will be displayed asking to save all rows or just the selection.

NOTE:

58

Begin data collection based on the contents of the Times and Interval boxes

To conserve program memory, only the last 500 rows will be displayed on the screen
at a time. All data will be placed into a temporary file.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Using MPS Explorer

Chapter 5

Data Visualization/Trending

MPS Data Visualization and Trending allow the user to configure the display
with specific metering data as well as Relay Word Bits that are then mapped to
graphs, gauges and bit indicators so that parameters can be monitored visually.
Each indicator auto scales to provide the best fit for the data for easy viewing. The
MPS Trending window is independent of the main application window, which
allows the user to switch back and forth without closing a window. The user can
display:
Current (Average Magnitude, Average Line, Angle, Imbalance)
Voltage (Angle, Imbalance, Magnitude)
Frequency
Ground Fault Current (Core Balance, Residual)
Motor Load
Power (Apparent, Reactive, Real, Power Factor)
Temperature (Ambient, Bearing Rise, Winding, Thermal Capacity Used)
Input states
Auxiliary relay states
Trip conditions
The parameters can be mapped to a specific bit, gauge or graph assignment.
The Data Acquisition Settings dialog window has tabs along the top that can
be selected and configured. To assign a parameter a specific location and display
form, select a parameter from the Data Available column (left column) as well
as a unassigned location from the Assignment column (right column). When

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

59

Chapter 5

Using MPS Explorer

both are highlighted, use the arrow located in the middle to move the parameter
to its assignment.

60

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Using MPS Explorer

Chapter 5

The Data Acquisition Settings also allows the user to map specific hardware data
to indicators that are displayed on the screen. The control type can be changed
via the Bits, Gauges and Graphs tab along the top of the window. The Layout tab,
shown below, can be used to view the correlation between control numbers and
their position on the main trending window.

The time between samples can be changed within this window. It can be
decreased to allow for a more accurate representation of the monitored event
or increased to reduce space if metering for a long period of time. NOTE: The
sampling time will be affected by the current serial port speed setting and other
factors of latency involved in serial communications. Collecting TAR, MET,
and RTD data simultaneously will have a higher minimum acquire time than
collecting only one or two of the parameters separately. By default, MPS Explorer
uses a minimum half-second acquire time, but in most applications this should
be higher to minimize data loss.

Validate Settings

The validate settings dialog quickly checks the device settings and will catch
errors or inconsistencies when the parameter settings do not match the hardware
settings or capabilities. The validation can be done manually by clicking the
highlighted button, or automatically before a settings download takes place.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

61

Chapter 5

Using MPS Explorer

A list of possible errors will appear showing the name and problem that may
contribute to an error.

I/O Mapping

MPS Explorer allows the user to easily configure the I/O Map to assign
protection trip functions to the Trip relay, assign functions to the auxiliary
relay and assign functions to the selected input.
When connected to the device, the user can select I/O Mapping from the
Settings tree as shown.

Then, a list of the Trip, Auxiliary Relays and Inputs will be displayed for
configuration. Once the list is displayed, the user can locate a specific Trip,
Auxiliary or Input to modify. Double-click on a name to open the dialog box that
will display each available bit with a corresponding parameter. To enable a bit,
click the check box, and then click Save.

62

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Using MPS Explorer

Resetting/Restoring

Chapter 5

Restoring Parameter Values


Software: Navigate to MPS > Parameters > Open Default Settings to restore
the default program settings or the settings in the specified file. The hardware
settings will not be restored until the settings are downloaded to the device.
Hardware: Navigate to MPS > Commands > Restore Defaults to restore the
hardware factory defaults. This option will immediately restore the hardware
parameter values and perform a hardware reboot. After the reboot is complete,
the software must be reconnected manually. Performing this action will alter
the state of the relay and should not be performed while the relay is being used
in an application.

Hardware Reboot
Navigate to MPS > Commands > Reboot Relay to initiate a hardware reboot
that will clear the hardware self-test status. This action will change the state of the
relay and should not be performed while it is being used in an application.

Troubleshooting
Problem:

MPS Explorer does not detect the presence of the hardware, even when the auto-detect option
is used.

Solution:

- Ensure the correct serial port is selected in the Communications Settings window
- Make sure the serial cable is physically and securely connected to the computer and relay.
- Close all other applications that may be attempting to access the serial port.

Problem:

A hard copy of the parameters and their current values is desired.

Solution:

Save the parameters to a file and open that file in any text editor. With the text editor, the file
can be printed as any normal text file. Be careful not to modify the text if the file will be loaded
into the MPS Explorer again.

Problem:

The Start button has been pressed in the Trending window, but the indicators are not updating.

Solution:

Not all of the data available in the Trending Settings dialog is available from the hardware at all
times. Hardware and parameter settings will dictate which data is currently being acquired. To
verify whether the data is available Start the Trending and open the corresponding MET, RTD or
TAR window to observer the data that is available there.

Problem:

The date and/or time is wrong in the metering and trending screens.

Solution:

The date/time displayed on these screens is the date/time set in the hardware. To change this
time use the Date/Time dialog.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

63

Chapter 5

64

Using MPS Explorer

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter

Configuring Protection & Logic Functions

Overview

This chapter describes configuring the 825-P relay settings for motor protection,
basic functions, I/O mapping, and communications.
NOTE:

Each 825-P is shipped with default factory settings. Calculate the settings for your motor
to ensure secure, dependable protection.

This chapter includes the following subsections:


Application Data information that is required about the protected
motor before calculating the relay settings
Main Settings settings that configure the relay inputs to accurately
measure and interpret the AC current and optional voltage input signals
Basic Motor Protection settings for protection elements included in all
models of the 825-P, including the thermal element, overcurrent elements,
load-loss functions, and load-jam functions
RTD-Based Protection settings associated with the RTD inputs
(requires RTD Scanner Module)
Voltage-Based Protection (Relays With Voltage Inputs) settings
associated with the optional AC voltage-based protection elements
I/O Configuration settings for the front-panel display control, control
inputs/outputs, and analog output for all relay models
Serial Port Settings settings that configure the relay front and rear panel
serial ports
DeviceNet Port Settings settings that configure the relay rear panel
DeviceNet port
Select Relay Logic Diagrams selected logic diagrams for protection,
control, and outputs

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

65

Chapter 6

Configuring Protection & Logic Functions

Application Data

Calculate the settings for the 825-P by collecting the following information
before you begin (collect the information for each speed for two-speed motor
applications):
Specifications of the protected motor:
Rated full load current
Service factor
Locked rotor current
Maximum locked rotor time with the motor at ambient and/or
operating temperature
Maximum motor starts per hour
Minimum time between motor starts
Additional data regarding the motor application:
Minimum no load current or power, if known.
Motor accelerating time. This is the normal time required for the motor
to reach full speed.
Maximum time to reach motor full load.
NOTE:

Main Settings

This time could be significantly longer than the motor accelerating time, particularly in
pump motor applications where the motor could run at full speed for some time before the
pump reaches full head and full load.

Current transformer primary and secondary ratings, if used


System phase rotation and nominal frequency
Voltage transformer ratios and connections, if used
Type and location of resistance temperature devices (RTDs), if used
Expected fault current magnitudes for motor or cable ground and threephase faults

Identifier Settings
All models of the 825-P have the identifier settings described in Table 7.
Table 7 - Identifier Settings
Setting Prompt

Setting Range

Factory Default

UNIT ID LINE 1

16 Characters

825-P Modular

UNIT ID LINE 2

16 Characters

Prot. System

The 825-P prints the Relay and Terminal Identifier strings at the top of responses
to serial port commands to identify messages from individual relays. Enter up to
16 characters, including capital letters AZ, numbers 09, periods (.), dashes (-),
and spaces. Suggested identifiers include the location, process, circuit, size, or
equipment number of the protected motor.

66

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Configuring Protection & Logic Functions

Chapter 6

Phase Rotation, Nominal Frequency Settings


Table 8 - Phase Rotation, Nominal Frequency Settings
Setting Prompt

Setting Range

Factory Default

PHASE ROTATION

ABC, ACB

ABC

RATED FREQUENCY

50, 60 Hz

60

DATE FORMAT

MDY, YMD, DMY

MDY

The phase rotation setting tells the relay your phase labeling standard. Set Phase
Rotation equal to ABC when B-phase current lags A-phase current by 120.
Set Phase Rotation equal to ACB when B-phase current leads A-phase current
by 120.
The thermal overload algorithm is dependent on the proper phase rotation
setting. An improper phase rotation will cause nuisance tripping.
Figure 28 - Phase Rotation Setting
C

PHROT = ABC

PHROT = ACB

Set the Rated Freq. equal to your system nominal frequency.

Date Format
The Date Format setting allows you to change the relay date presentation format
to either North American standard (Month/Day/Year), engineering standard
(Year/Month/Day), or European standard (Day/Month/Year).

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

67

Chapter 6

Configuring Protection & Logic Functions

Current Transformer (CT) Configuration, Full Load Current Settings


Table 9 - CT Configuration and Full Load Current Settings
Setting Prompt

Setting Range

Factory Default

PHASE CT RATIO

15000

MOTOR FLA (Ie)

0.55000 A

0.5

TWO SPEED ENABLE

Y, N

CT RATIO2nd

15000

MOTOR FLA2nd

0.55000 A

0.5

CORE B. CT RATIO

12000

100

Note the following:


Motor FLA settings are in Primary Amperes.
The allowed setting range is dependent on the MCM module that is
connected to the relay. The MOTOR FLA and PHASE CT RATIO
setting ranges will be a subset of the full ranges shown in Table 9.
When Two Speed Enable = Y and a Speed 2 control input is specified,
the relay uses CT Ratio-2nd and Motor FLA-2nd for the overload
thermal model.
CTs with a 1 or 5 A rated secondary current can be used with the
Converter Module MCM2, MCM5 or MCM20, respectively. If another
MCM module is used, the relay automatically sets CT Ratios = 1.
The CT ratio and full-load current settings, along with the connected MCM
module, configure the relay to accurately scale measured values and report the
primary quantities. Calculate the phase and neutral CT ratios by dividing the
primary rating by the secondary rating.
The relay runs interdependency checks on the FLA and CT ratios based upon
the ratings of the MCM module that is connected. If a value is set that violates
the interdependency rules, then the user will be prompted to adjust settings
to eliminate conflicts.
EXAMPLE

Phase CT Ratio Setting Calculation:


Consider an application where
Phase CT Rating=100:5A.
Set the CT Ratio =100/5 := 20

68

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Configuring Protection & Logic Functions

Chapter 6

Voltage Transformer (VT) Configuration Settings


Relays that are not equipped with phase voltage inputs will hide these settings
and disable voltage-based protection and metering functions.
Table 10 shows voltage settings for relay models with optional voltage inputs.
Table 10 - CT Configuration and Full Load Current Settings
Setting Prompt

Setting Range

Factory Default

PHASE VT RATIO

1250

34.65

LINE VOLTAGE

10030000V

4160

XFMR CONNECTION

Delta

Wye Delta

NOTE:

The line voltage setting is in primary volts.

These settings configure the optional relay voltage inputs to correctly measure
and scale the voltage signals. Calculate the Phase VT Ratio by dividing the
primary rating by the secondary rating.
EXAMPLE

Phase VT Ratio Setting Calculation:


Consider a Phase VT Ratio Setting calculation, consider a 4000V motor application
where 4200:120V rated voltage transformers (connected in open delta) are used.
Set the VT Ratio := 4200/120 := 35 and DELTA_Y := Delta

When phase-to-phase PTs are connected to the relay, set XFMR Connection
equal to Delta. When phase-to-neutral PTs are connected to the relay, set XFMR
Connection equal to Wye.

Basic Motor Protection


IMPORTANT

Settings associated with options or accessories (converter module, voltage input card,
expansion I/O card, RTD scanner) require their installation or connection prior to being
made available for configuration.

ATTENTION: Configuration of protection elements is not complete until the elements


are assigned to the trip or auxiliary relays. Refer to I/O Assignments for instructions.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

69

Chapter 6

Configuring Protection & Logic Functions

Overload (Thermal Model)


The 825-P motor thermal element provides integrated protection for all of the
following motor operating conditions:
Locked rotor starts
Running overload
Imbalance current/negative-sequence current heating
Repeated or frequent starting
NOTE:

You can set the Run State Time Constant of the thermal overload curve. If the Run State Time
Constant is not known, set it to Auto; the relay configures the overload curve continuous
with the locked rotor curve.

When overload protection is enabled, the relay configures a thermal curve based
on the motor Full Load Amps, Service Factor, Locked Rotor Amps, Hot Locked
Rotor Time, and Acceleration Factor settings. See Figure 32 for selected settings
of Thermal Overload curves.
The relay operates a thermal model with a trip value defined by the relay settings
and a present heat estimate that varies with time and changing motor current.
The relay expresses the present motor thermal estimate as % Thermal Capacity.
When the % Thermal Capacity reaches 100%, the relay trips.
If the thermal model is turned off (Overload Enable := N), the thermal model is
disabled, the output of the thermal model is blocked, and the relay reports the
% Thermal Capacity as 999 as noted in Chapter 7: Metering & Monitoring.

70

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Configuring Protection & Logic Functions

Chapter 6

Table 11 - Overload (Thermal Model) Settings


Setting Prompt

Setting Range

Factory Default

OVERLOAD ENABLE

Y, N

OL RESET MODE

Man, Auto

Man

OL RESET LEVEL

1099%TCU

75

SERVICE FACTOR

1.011.50

1.01

MOTOR LRC

2.512.0 x Ie

6.0

LOCKD ROTOR TIME

1.0600.0 s

10.0

ACCEL FACTOR

0.101.50

1.00

RUN STATE TIME K

Auto, 12000 min

Auto

MOTOR LRC2nd

2.512.0 x Ie

6.0

MOTOR LRT2nd

1.0600.0 s

10.0

ACCEL FACT2nd

0.101.50

1.00

RUN ST TC2nd

Auto, 12000 min

Auto

OL WARN LEVEL

Off, 5099%TCU

85

START INH. LEVEL

Off, 199%TCU

Off

STOP COOL TIME

12200 min

18

OL RTD BIASING

Y, N

IMPORTANT

For compliance to IEC standards regarding thermal overload protection, set the
SERVICE FACTOR to a value: 1.051.20.

When you enable overload protection, the relay requests information about the
protected motor capabilities. Obtain the requested information (except the
acceleration factor) from the motor specifications.
The 825-P thermal element always operates in one of two modes: starting or
running. In starting mode, the thermal element trips in Locked Rotor Time
at Locked Rotor Current whether the motor is at ambient or at normal operating
temperature. In running mode, the thermal element provides overload protection
by limiting the motor heat energy estimate to a value represented by the overload
settings.
The locked rotor time setting is for a hot motor condition. If only one locked
rotor time is specified for a particular motor, unless the specification states
otherwise, assume the time is the cold locked rotor time. Multiply the cold locked
rotor time by 0.833 to determine a hot locked rotor time which is acceptable
for most motors.
NOTE:

When Two Speed Enable = Y and a Speed 2 control input is specified, the relay uses the
2nd FLA-related settings for the overload thermal model

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

71

Chapter 6

Configuring Protection & Logic Functions

Thermal Element Setting

EXAMPLE

A 4000V 600 Hp motor is protected using the 825-P Thermal Overload Element. Motor
data sheet includes the following:
Rated Horsepower = 600 Hp
Rated Voltage = 4000V
Rated Full Load Current = 80 A
Rated Locked Rotor Amps = 480 A
Safe Stall Time at 100% Volts:
Cold = 18 seconds
Hot = 15 seconds
Service Factor = 1.2
Phase current transformers with 100:5 A rating and the MCM20 module are selected
for application. 825-P settings for application are calculated as shown below:
Current Transformer Ratio: := 100/5 := 20
Full Load Amps (Ie): := 80 A primary
Service Factor: := 1.2
Locked Rotor Amps: := 480.0/80.0 := 6.0 x Ie
Hot Locked Rotor Time: := 15.0 seconds
Run state time constant: := Auto
NOTE:

To prevent nuisance tripping from occurring when a motor operates at the rated service
factor, set Service Factor to 0.01 plus the motor nameplate value.

If the Locked Rotor Ampere rating for the motor is unknown, but the motor
has a Motor Code designation, use the following table as provided by NEMA
(National Electrical Manufacturer Association) to determine the locked rotor
ampere value.
Table 12 - Motor Codes
Letter Designation

kVA/HP

Letter Designation

kVA/HP

03.15

9.010.0

3.153.55

10.011.2

3.554.0

11.212.5

4.04.5

12.514.0

4.55.0

14.016.0

5.05.6

16.018.0

5.66.3

18.020.0

6.37.1

20.022.4

7.18.0

22.4 and up

8.09.0

Locked kVA per horsepower range includes the lower figure up to, but not including, the higher figure; e.g., 3.14 is designated by letter
A and 3.15 is designated by letter B.

72

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Configuring Protection & Logic Functions

Chapter 6

The Acceleration Factor setting reduces or extends the allowed accelerating time
under locked rotor conditions. You can always safely set this value equal to 1.00.
If you know that the driven load always accelerates in less than the rated locked
rotor time, you could use an acceleration factor less than 1.00 to provide a faster
trip in locked rotor conditions. Do not, however, set the value greater than 1.00,
except to allow a start with a longer than normal accelerating time (e.g., high
inertia motor application, emergency condition).

Acceleration Factor Setting Calculation:


EXAMPLE

In a particular application, a motor with a 10 second hot-locked rotor time always


starts in 5 seconds.
Setting the acceleration factor equal to 0.75 causes the relay to trip in 7.5 seconds
under locked rotor conditions. This setting allows ample time for the motor to start,
but does not subject the motor to the full 10 seconds of locked rotor current if a locked
rotor start attempt takes place.

When the motor thermal capacity used exceeds the Overload Warning Level
setting, the relay issues a warning. The early warning could allow you to correct
the load problem before a thermal trip occurs.
The motor tripping and starting functions include supervision to help prevent a
thermal trip on a normal start. The relay prevents motor starting until the thermal
element has enough available thermal capacity to allow a motor start without
tripping. Set START INH. LEVEL to a value equal to the incremental increase in
percent thermal capacity utilized for one start plus additional margin. The 825-P
allows a new start when the percent thermal capacity utilized value is below 100 START INH. LEVEL. This feature can be disabled by setting START INH.
LEVEL equal to Off.
A stopped motor could take longer to cool than a running motor because of
reduced airflow or loss of forced coolant. The equation used is:
COOLTIME = 0.03 k LRTHOTn (LRAn) 2 minutes
where:
n = 1 or 2 (select the one that gives higher COOLTIME)
k > 1.0

Round up the result to the next integer. The value k = 1.0 yields stop cool time
equal to run cool time.
The factory default settings assume that the motor stopped cooling time is
approximately the same as the motor running cooling time. Calculate the
STOP COOL TIME setting for your application using the value that you
want for k > 1.0.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

73

Chapter 6

Configuring Protection & Logic Functions

Motor running and stopped cooling times or time constants could be provided
by the motor manufacturer. If a time constant is provided, multiply that value
by 3 to calculate the STOP COOL TIME setting.
OL RESET MODE determines the reset mode for the overload element. If set
to Auto, the overload trip resets automatically when the element resets, provided
no other trip conditions are present. If set to Manual, operator intervention is
required to reset the overload trip.
OL RESET LEVEL determines the Thermal Capacity Utilized (%TCU) Level
below which the relay allows Reset (Automatic or Manual) following an overload
trip.
You can bypass the Thermal Model by ambient temperature when OL RTD
BIASING is set equal to Y. The Overload RTD Bias is calculated using the
ambient temperature above 40C and Winding RTD Trip temperature setting.
NOTE:

In addition to setting OL RTD BIASING := Y, you must set one RTD Location equal to Ambient,
at least one RTD Location equal to Winding, and set the Winding Trip Level (see Table 27
for details).

Short Circuit
Table 13 - Short Circuit Settings
Setting Prompt

Setting Range

Factory Default

SC TRIP LEVEL

Off, 4.0012.00 x Ie

Off

SC TRIP DELAY

0.005.00 s

0.00

SC WARN LEVEL

Off, 4.0012.00 x Ie

Off

SC WARN DELAY

0.005.00 s

0.50

If the 825-P is connected to a motor protected by a fused contactor, disable the


short circuit element by setting its Trip level to Off. If the relay is connected to a
device capable of interrupting fault current, use the element to detect and trip for
short circuit faults. Set the Short Circuit Trip Level to a value greater than the
motor locked rotor current rating. Set the Short Circuit Warn Level to the value
that you want with appropriate time delay.
NOTE:

The 825-P short circuit elements normally operate using the output of a cosine filter
algorithm. During heavy fault currents when the relay detects severe MCM/CT saturation
the overcurrent elements operate on the output of a bipolar peak detector.

Based on the level of an harmonic distortion index, the short circuit overcurrent
elements operate on either the output of the cosine filter or the output of the
bipolar peak detector. When the harmonic distortion index exceeds the fixed
threshold that indicates severe MCM/CT saturation, the short circuit
overcurrent elements operate on the output of the bipolar peak detector.

74

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Configuring Protection & Logic Functions

Chapter 6

When the harmonic distortion index is below the fixed threshold, the short
circuit overcurrent elements operate on the output of the cosine filter.
The cosine filter provides excellent performance in removing DC offset and
harmonics. However, the bipolar peak detector has the best performance in
situations of severe MCM/CT saturation when the cosine filter magnitude
estimation is significantly degraded. Combining the two filters ensures
dependable short circuit overcurrent element operation.

Ground Fault

Basic Information
Table 14 - Ground-Fault Core Balance Settings

NOTE:

Setting Prompt

Setting Range

Factory Default

GF-CB TRIP LEVEL

Off, 0.0125.00 A

Off

GF-CB TRIP DELAY

0.005.00 s

0.00

GF-CB WARN LEVEL

Off, 0.0125.00 A

Off

GF-CB WARN DELAY

0.0120.0 s

10.0

GF-CB Trip Level settings are in Primary Amperes.

The relay offers two types of ground-fault detecting elements. The CB elements
operate using current measured through an external core balance (zero sequence)
CT. The residual (RES) elements operate using a residual ground-fault
measurement from the MCM module.
While the ground-fault trip and warning levels offer an overall range of
0.0125 A, the actual input circuitry has a dynamic sensing range of 5500 mA.
Determine the range (in terms of primary amps) that is valid for a given
application by multiplying the input sensing range of 5500 mA by the turns
ratio of the core balance sensor.
For information about corresponding valid ground fault setting ranges for typical
sensors, see Table 15.
Table 15 - Ground-Fault Sensor-to-Settings Correlation
Ground Fault Sensor Ratio

Valid Setting Range

1:1

0.010.50 A

50:5

0.105.00 A

100:1

1.0025.00 A

2000:1

20.0025.00

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

75

Chapter 6

Configuring Protection & Logic Functions

When a ground-fault CT is connected to the 825-P, as in Figure 14, use the CB


ground-fault element to detect motor ground faults. Calculate the Trip and Warn
level settings based on the available ground fault current and the CB CT ratio.
EXAMPLE

Ground-Fault CB CT Application
A resistance-grounded transformer limits current for motor or cable ground faults.
The resistor is sized to limit current to 10 A primary. The three motor leads are passed
through the window of a 10:1 core balance CT. The CT secondary is connected to 825-P
CBCT input terminals, as shown in Figure 29. Setting the core balance CT Ratio equal to
10 and Ground Fault Trip Level equal to 5 A with 0.10 second time delay ensures that
the element quickly detects and trips for motor ground faults, but prevents faulty
operation due to unequal breaker or contactor pole closing times.

Figure 29 - Ground-Fault Protection Using Core Balance CT


S1

S2

1A
A B C

Motor

10:1
Window CT

10 A

10 A
C-Ground Fault

Table 16 - Ground-Fault Residual Settings

NOTE:

Setting Prompt

Setting Range

Factory Default

GF-RES TRIP LEVL

Off, 0.101.00 x Ie

Off

GF-RES TRIP DLAY

0.005.00 s

0.50

GF-RES WARN LEVL

Off, 0.101.00 x Ie

Off

GF-RES WARN DLAY

0.0120.0 s

10.0

Phase CT ratios are typically higher than CB CT ratios. For this reason, the relay sensitivity to
motor ground faults is less when the residual overcurrent element is used instead of the CB
element. A separate ground fault detection method should be used if a CB CT is not available
in applications where resistance grounding reduces the available ground fault current.

For solidly grounded systems, the residual ground fault elements can be used.

76

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Configuring Protection & Logic Functions

Chapter 6

Jam
Table 17 - Jam Settings
Setting Prompt

Setting Range

Factory Default

JAM TRIP LEVEL

Off, 1.006.00 x Ie

Off

JAM TRIP DELAY

0.0120.0 s

5.0

JAM WARN LEVEL

Off, 1.006.00 x Ie

Off

JAM WARN DELAY

0.0120.0 s

10.0

When the motor is running, the relay offers jam detection. When the motor load
jams (stalling the motor), the phase current increases to near the locked rotor
value. When Load Jam Tripping is enabled, if the phase current exceeds the Load
Jam Trip Level setting for longer than the time delay setting, the relay trips. Set
the Load Jam Trip Level greater than the expected normal load current but less
than the rated locked rotor current. This setting is entered in per unit of the Full
Load Amps (Ie) setting.

Undercurrent (Load Loss)

Table 18 - Undercurrent Settings


Setting Prompt

Setting Range

Factory Default

UC TRIP LEVEL

Off, 0.101.00 x Ie

Off

UC TRIP DELAY

0.0120.0 s

5.0

UC WARN LEVEL

Off, 0.101.00 x Ie

Off

UC WARN DELAY

0.0120.0 s

10.0

UC START INHIBIT

01500 s

The relay arms the load-loss detection logic after the motor starts, as defined by
the Undercurrent Start Inhibit time delay setting. Set this delay to allow pumps or
compressors to reach normal load. Once armed, this function issues a warning or
trip if phase current drops below warn or trip level for the specified time delay.
Set the Undercurrent Trip and Warn Levels greater than the expected motor no
load current, but less than the minimum current expected when the motor is
operating normally. These settings are entered in per unit of the Full Load Amps
(Ie) setting.
If you expect the motor to normally operate at no load, disable the Trip and Warn
elements. The relay automatically hides the associated time delay settings.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

77

Chapter 6

Configuring Protection & Logic Functions

Current Imbalance/
Phase Loss

Table 19 - Current Imbalance Settings


Setting Prompt

Setting Range

Factory Default

CI TRIP LEVEL

Off, 580%

Off

CI TRIP DELAY

0240 s

CI WARN LEVEL

Off, 580%

10

CI WARN DELAY

0240 s

10

Imbalanced motor terminal voltages cause imbalanced stator currents to flow in


the motor. The negative-sequence current component of the imbalance current
causes significant rotor heating. While the 825-P motor thermal element models
the heating effect of the negative-sequence current, you could want the additional
imbalance and single-phasing protection offered by a current imbalance element.
The 825-P calculates percent imbalance current in one of two ways, depending
on the magnitude of the average current.
When the average current, Iav, is:
1. greater than the motor-rated full load current, the relay calculates the
percent imbalance:
UB% = 100 x

[(Im - Iav)]
Iav

2. less than the motor-rated full load current, the relay calculates the percent
imbalance:
UB% = 100 x

where:
UB%
Im
Iav
FLA

[(Im - Iav)]
FLA

= current imbalance percentage


= magnitude of phase current with largest deviation from average
= magnitude of the average phase current
= motor-rated full load current

In either case, the function is disabled if the average phase current magnitude is
less than 25% of the Full Load Amps setting.
A 1% voltage imbalance typically causes approximately 6% current imbalance in
induction motors. If a 2% voltage imbalance can occur in your location, set the
current imbalance Warn Level greater than 12% to prevent nuisance alarms. A
15% current imbalance Warn Level setting corresponds to an approximately 2.5%
voltage imbalance, and a 20% current imbalance trip setting corresponds to an
approximately 3.3% voltage imbalance. A 10-second alarm delay and 5-second
trip delay should provide adequate performance in most applications.

78

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Configuring Protection & Logic Functions

Chapter 6

Protection Disable
Table 20 - Protection Disable Settings
Setting Prompt

Setting Range

Factory Default

PROT INHIBIT TIME

Off, 1240 s

Off

OL INHIBIT TIME

Off, 1240 s

Off

ATTENTION: The protection can be seriously jeopardized when either of the Inhibit
Time settings is used. For most applications, set the value of PROT INHIBIT TIME and
OL INHIBIT TIME to Off.

You can disable Trip and Warning levels of preselected protection elements for a
set time delay during motor Starting. Set the Protection Inhibit Time for a delay
to disable Undercurrent, Short Circuit, Current Imbalance, Ground Fault, and
Undervoltage elements. Set the Overload Inhibit Time for a delay to disable the
Overload (Thermal Model) element. If you are using the time delay settings, keep
them as short as possible.
NOTE:

The 825-P determines the motor state (Starting, Running, or Stopped) primarily based on
the motor current.

Start Monitoring
Table 21 - Start Monitor Settings

NOTE:

Setting Prompt

Setting Range

Factory Default

START MOTOR TIME

Off, 1240 s

Off

With Star-Delta (Wye-Delta) starting, the total starting time (Star and Delta) is monitored.
If immediate tripping is required in the event of stalling, monitoring must be provided by a
Speed Switch Function.

If motor starting has not finished by the set time, the relay produces a trip. The
start monitoring is independent of the overload protection provided by the
thermal model. Figure 30 shows the typical current during motor start and the
Start Motor Time setting.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

79

Chapter 6

Configuring Protection & Logic Functions

Figure 30 - Monitoring Starting Time

I
1.2 Ie

1.1 Ie

t
tv
1 = Motor Starting Current
2 = Rated Conditions

Star-Delta (Wye-Delta)
Starting

tv = Start Motor Time


3 = Tripping (if starting lasts too long)

Table 22 - Star-Delta Settings

NOTE:

Setting Prompt

Setting Range

Factory Default

STAR-DELTA ENABL

Y, N

MAX STAR TIME

Off, 1600 s

Off

In addition to enabling the Star-Delta, you must assign Star and Delta to Auxiliary output
relays (one each).

The 825-P issues the command to switch from Star to Delta (Wye to Delta) as
soon as the starting current has dropped to the rated value and the motor has
reached its normal speed in Star (Wye). If starting has not been completed within
the normal time for this application (Max Star Time setting, if used), the relay
makes the change to delta, regardless of the speed attained.
You can switch the maximum permissible time for star (wye) operation on or off.
If it is off, the change to delta is made solely based on the motor current. If the
motor has to be switched off when the total start time (Star and Delta) exceeds a
set time, the Start Monitoring must also be used.

80

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Configuring Protection & Logic Functions

Chapter 6

Start Inhibit
Table 23 - Start Inhibit Settings
Setting Prompt

Setting Range

Factory Default

STARTS/HR.

Off, 115

Off

MIN. OFF TIME

Off, 1150 min

Off

RESTART BLK TIME

Off, 160 min

Off

When the protected motor is rated for a specific maximum number of starts per
hour or minimum time between starts, set the Starts/Hr. and Min. Off Time
settings accordingly. If the maximum number of starts per hour is achieved and
the motor stops or is tripped, the relay asserts the Trip output contact to prevent
an additional start until 60 minutes after the oldest start. If the motor stops or is
tripped within the minimum time between starts period, the relay asserts the Trip
output contact to prevent a new start until the minutes after the most recent start
equals the Min. Off Time setting.
In certain pump applications, fluid flowing backward through the pump could
spin the pump motor for a short time in the reverse direction after the motor is
stopped. An attempt to start the motor during this time can be damaging. To
prevent motor starts during the backspin period, enter a time in minutes in the
RESTART BLK TIME setting. If the relay trips or the motor is stopped, the relay
generates a trip signal and maintain it for at least this amount of time. The relay
does not issue a start during the Restart Block period.
The relay maintains the trip signal until enough time passes for the motor to be
safely restarted. During the lockout period, the relay displays a countdown time in
minutes to the next allowed start.
The Emergency Restart function overrides all three limits, clearing % TCU to
zero and allowing the motor to be put back in service for an emergency.

Phase Reversal Protection


Table 24 - Phase Reversal Setting
Setting Prompt

Setting Range

Factory Default

PH REV. ENABLE

Y, N

The 825-P uses phase currents or phase voltages (if available) to determine
that the phase rotation of signals applied to the relay matches the phase rotation
setting. When you set Ph. Rev. Enable equal to Y, the relay trips 0.5 seconds after
incorrect phase rotation signals are applied to the relay.
For relays equipped with current inputs only, the trip occurs approximately
0.5 seconds after the motor start is initiated. When the relay is equipped with
voltage inputs, the trip occurs approximately 0.5 seconds after AC voltages are
applied to the relay.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

81

Chapter 6

Configuring Protection & Logic Functions

Speed Switch (Stalling


During Start)

Table 25 - Speed Switch Settings

NOTE:

Setting Prompt

Setting Range

Factory Default

SS TRIP DELAY

Off, 1240 s

Off

SS WARN DELAY

Off, 1240 s

Off

In addition to setting the SS DELAY, you must connect the speed switch contact to an input
assigned to Speed Switch (see Table 44 and Figure 5, Figure 20, and Figure 21 for connection
diagrams).

Speed Switch (stalling during start) protection provides mechanical sensing of a


locked rotor condition through input monitoring of a speed switch that is
mechanically coupled to the motor shaft. When the SS TRIP DELAY is set, the
relay trips if the speed switch is not closed within the set time after the motor
start begins. A separate delay, SS WARN DELAY, can also be set to provide a
warning before the Speed Switch trip. Figure 31 shows typical currents during
motor start (normal and stall during start) and the Speed Switch Trip Delay time
setting.
Figure 31 - Stalling During Starting
I
I
Ie

1 = Normal Start without Hindrance


by High Overload or Stalling
2 = Stalling During Standing
tv = SS TRIP DELAY Time

Ie
t

tv

Thermistor (PTC) Monitoring


Table 26 - PTC Settings

82

Setting Prompt

Setting Range

Factory Default

PTC ENABLE

Y, N

PTC RESET MODE

Man, Auto

Man

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Configuring Protection & Logic Functions

NOTE:

Chapter 6

In addition to enabling the PTC function, you must also connect at least one (but no more
than six) thermistor(s) to the relay (see Figure XX for a connection diagram).

You can connect up to six PTC thermistor sensors to the 825-P. The detectors are
typically embedded in the stator winding of the motor and they monitor the
actual temperature of the winding. This function is independent of the thermal
model and accounts for conditions such as ambient temperature, obstructed
cooling, etc. The sensors and their leads are also monitored for short-circuit
faults.
Figure 32 shows characteristics of the PTC. Setting PTC RESET MODE
determines reset mode for the PTC element. If set to Auto mode, the PTC trip
resets automatically when the element resets, if other trip conditions are not
present. If set to Man, operator intervention (e.g., front-panel push button) is
required to reset the PTC trip.
Figure 32 - Characteristic of PTC Sensors as per IEC 34-11-2
4000

1330

R (W)

550
250
100

20
10
20 C
0 C

TNF 20 K
TNF 5 K

TNF + 15 K
TNF + 5 K
TNF

TNF Nominal pickup temperature


R (W) Resistance to sensors

RTD-Based Protection

RTD Monitoring
When you connect the 825-PR12D RTD Module, the 825-P offers several
protection and monitoring functions whose settings are described in Table 27.
See Figure 4 for the location of the RTD module fiber-optic cable connector.

NOTE:

The 825-P can monitor up to 12 RTDs connected to the 825-PR12D Module. Table 27 shows
Location, Type, and Trip/Warn Level settings only for RTD1; settings for RTD2 through RTD12
are similar.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

83

Chapter 6

Configuring Protection & Logic Functions

NOTE:

A fiber optic cable is not included with the 825-PR12D. A simplex 62.5/125 m fiber-optic
cable with ST connector is needed for connecting the 825-PR12D to the 825-P (eg., part#
1570FCBL-MM-SX-62-STST-2M from Ultra Spec Cable - http://store.ultraspec.us).

Table 27 - RTD Settings


Setting Prompt

Setting Range

Factory Default

RTD ENABLE

Y, N

RTD RESET MODE

Man, Auto

Man

RTD1 LOCATION

Off, WDG, BRG, AMB, OTH

Off

RTD1 TYPE

PT100, NI100, NI120, CU10

PT100

RTD1 TRIP LEVEL

Off, 1250C

Off

RTD1 WARN LEVEL

Off, 1250C

Off

WIND TRIP VOTING

Y, N

BEAR TRIP VOTING

Y, N

TMP RTD BIASING?

Y, N

When the 825-PR12D Module is not connected to the relay, disable the RTD
function by setting RTD ENABLE equal to N.
Setting RTD RESET MODE determines the reset mode for the RTD element.
If set to Auto mode, the RTD trip resets automatically when the element resets,
provided no other trip conditions are present. If set to Man, operator
intervention (e.g., front-panel push button) is required to reset the RTD trip.
The relay allows you to independently define the location of each monitored
RTD using the RTD LOCATION settings.
Define the RTD Location settings using the following suggestions:
If an RTD is not connected to an input, or has failed in place and is not
being replaced, set the RTD Location for that input to Off.
For RTDs embedded in motor stator windings, set the RTD Location
equal to WDG.
For inputs connected to RTDs measuring bearing rise temperature, set the
RTD Location equal to BRG.
For the input connected to an RTD measuring ambient motor cooling air
temperature, set the RTD Location equal to AMB. Only one ambient
temperature RTD is allowed.
For inputs connected to monitor temperatures of another apparatus, set
the RTD Location equal to OTH.
The relay allows you to independently define the type of each monitored RTD
using the RTD Type settings.

84

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Configuring Protection & Logic Functions

Chapter 6

If an RTD Location setting is equal to Off, the relay does not request that an
RTD Type setting be entered for that input.
The four available RTD types are:
100-ohm platinum (PT100)
100-ohm nickel (NI100)
120-ohm nickel (NI120)
10-ohm copper (CU10)
The 825-P provides temperature warnings and trips using the RTD temperature
measurements and the warning and trip temperature settings in Table 27.
The relay issues a winding temperature warning if any of the healthy winding
RTDs (RTD Location setting equals WDG) indicate a temperature greater than
the corresponding RTD Warning Temperature setting. The relay issues a winding
temperature trip if one or two of the healthy winding RTDs indicate a
temperature greater than their RTD Trip Temperature settings. Two winding
RTDs must indicate excessive temperature when the Winding Trip Voting setting
equals Y. Only one excessive temperature indication is required if Winding Trip
Voting is not enabled. Bearing Trip Voting works similarly.
The warning and trip temperature settings for Bearing, Ambient, and Other
RTD types function similarly except that trip voting is not available for Ambient
and Other RTDs.
To disable a temperature warning or trip function, set the appropriate
temperature setting to Off.
Only healthy RTDs can contribute temperatures to the warning and trip
functions. The relay includes specific logic to indicate if RTD leads are shorted or
open.
When you have connected an ambient temperature sensing RTD and set trip
temperatures for one or more winding RTDs, the relay gives you the option
to enable RTD Trip Temperature biasing by setting TMP RTD BIASING
equal to Y. The thermal model can also be biased by setting OL RTD BIASING
equal to Y (see Table 11) When you enable either of the biasing, the relay
does the following:
Calculates RTD % Thermal Capacity and adds the value to the Thermal
Meter values.
Automatically reduces the winding RTD Trip Temperatures if ambient
temperature rises above 40C and TMP RTD BIASING is set equal to Y.
Automatically reduces the Thermal Model element trip threshold if
ambient temperature rises above 40C and OL RTD BIASING is set equal
to Y.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

85

Chapter 6

Configuring Protection & Logic Functions

Provides an RTD Bias Alarm if the winding temperature exceeds 60C rise
over ambient and the RTD % Thermal Capacity exceeds the thermal
element % Thermal Capacity by more than 10%.
EXAMPLE

Relay Calculation of RTD% Thermal Capacity


Ambient
Winding RTD
RTD%
Temperature Temperature
Thermal =
Ambient
Capacity
Winding RTD Trip
Temperature
Temperature

As ambient temperature rises, the motors ability to shed heat to the surroundings
is reduced and internal temperatures rise. To preserve insulation life, NEMA
standards suggest a 1C reduction in RTD Trip Temperature for each 1C rise in
ambient temperature over 40C.
When you enable RTD biasing, the 825-P automatically reduces the RTD Trip
Temperatures for all winding RTDs when ambient temperature is above 40C.
The relay reduces the trip temperatures by 1C for each degree rise in ambient
temperature over 40C.
Finally, when you enable Thermal Model biasing, the relay provides an RTD
Bias Alarm when the RTD % Thermal Capacity exceeds the thermal element
% Thermal Capacity by more than 10 percentage points while the winding
temperature rise is higher than 60C over ambient. This alarm can be a useful
indicator that the motor has lost coolant flow or that the winding RTD Trip
Temperature is conservatively low.
For all the RTD Thermal Capacity and bias calculations described above, the
relay uses the winding RTD whose measured temperature is closest to its trip
value.

Voltage-Based Protection

The following information applies to relay models with voltage inputs.

Undervoltage
Table 28 - Undervoltage Settings

86

Setting Prompt

Setting Range

Factory Default

UV TRIP LEVEL

Off, 0.601.00 xVnm

Off

UV TRIP DELAY

0.0120.0 s

0.0

UV WARN LEVEL

Off, 0.601.00 xVnm

Off

UV WARN DELAY

0.0120.0 s

5.0

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Configuring Protection & Logic Functions

Chapter 6

Overvoltage
Table 29 - Overvoltage Settings
Setting Prompt

Setting Range

Setting Name := Factory Default

OV TRIP LEVEL

Off, 1.001.20 xVnm

Off

OV TRIP DELAY

0.0120.0 s

0.0

OV WARN LEVEL

Off, 1.001.20 xVnm

Off

OV WARN DELAY

0.0120.0 s

5.0

When you connect the 825-P voltage inputs to phase-to-phase connected PTs,
as in Figure 12, the relay provides two levels of phase-to-phase overvoltage and
undervoltage elements.
When you connect the 825-P voltage inputs to phase-to-neutral connected PTs,
as in Figure 12, the relay provides two levels of phase-to-neutral overvoltage and
undervoltage elements.
Each of the elements has an associated time delay. You can use these elements
for tripping and warning. To disable an element, set the level setting to Off.

VAR Function
Table 30 - VAR Settings
Setting Prompt

Setting Range

Factory Default

NEG VAR TRIP LEV

Off, 125000 KVAR

Off

POS VAR TRIP LEV

Off, 125000 KVAR

Off

VAR TRIP DLY

0240 s

NEG VAR WARN LEV

Off, 125000 KVAR

Off

POS VAR WARN LEV

Off, 125000 KVAR

Off

VAR WARN DLY

0240 s

NOTE:

VAR Trip and Warning Level settings are in Primary KVAR.

If the positive or negative reactive power exceeds the appropriate level for longer
than the time delay setting, the relay can issue a warning or trip signal. The
reactive power elements are disabled when the motor is stopped or starting.
Elements can be used to detect synchronous motor out-of-step or loss-of-field
conditions.
Refer to Power Measurement Conventions on page107 for the relay power
measurement convention.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

87

Chapter 6

Configuring Protection & Logic Functions

For relay application on an induction motor, it is recommended that the installer


disable the elements by setting both the Negative VAR Warn Level and Negative
VAR Trip Level settings to Off.

Underpower
Table 31 - Underpower Settings

NOTE:

Setting Prompt

Setting Range

Factory Default

UP TRIP LEVEL

Off, 125000 kW

Off

UP TRIP DELAY

0240 s

UP WARN LEVEL

Off, 125000 kW

Off

UP WARN DELAY

0240 s

Underpower Trip and Warning Level settings are in Primary kW.

If the real three-phase power falls below the warning or trip level for longer
than the time delay setting, the relay can issue a warning or trip signal. The
underpower elements are disabled when the motor is stopped or starting.
Underpower elements operate in addition to the Load Loss function and you
can use them to detect motor load loss and other underpower conditions.
Disable the elements by setting the Underpower Warning Level and Underpower
Trip Level settings to Off.

Power Factor
Table 32 - Power Factor Settings
Setting Prompt

Setting Range

Factory Default

PF LAG TRIP LEV

Off, 0.050.99

Off

PF LD TRIP LEV

Off, 0.050.99

Off

PF TRIP DELAY

0240 s

PF LAG WARN LEV

Off, 0.050.99

Off

PF LD WARN LEV

Off, 0.050.99

Off

PF WARN DELAY

0240 s

If the measured power factor falls below the leading or lagging level for longer
than the time delay setting, the relay can issue a warning or trip signal. The power
factor elements are disabled when the motor is stopped or starting. Power factor
elements can be used to detect synchronous motor out-of-step or loss-of-field
conditions.
Refer to Power Measurement Conventions on page107 for the relay power
measurement convention.
88

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Configuring Protection & Logic Functions

Chapter 6

For application on an induction motor, it is recommended that the installer


disable the elements by setting all four Power Factor Level settings to Off.

Frequency
Table 33 - Frequency Settings
Setting Prompt

Setting Range

Factory Default

FREQ1 TRIP LEVEL

Off, 55.065.0 Hz

Off

FREQ1 TRIP DELAY

0.0240.0 s

0.0

FREQ1 WARN LEVEL

Off, 55.065.0 Hz

Off

FREQ1 WARN DELAY

0.0240.0 s

0.0

FREQ2 TRIP LEVEL

Off, 55.065.0 Hz

Off

FREQ2 TRIP DELAY

0.0240.0 s

0.0

FREQ2 WARN LEVEL

Off, 55.065.0 Hz

Off

FREQ2 WARN DELAY

0.0240.0 s

0.0

NOTE:

The setting range for Trip and Warn Levels shown in Table 33 are for Rated Freq. := 60 Hz. The
setting ranges are Off, 45.055.0 Hz when Rated Freq. := 50 Hz.

The 825-P provides two warning and two trip overfrequency or underfrequency
elements with independent level and time-delay settings. When an element level
setting is less than the Nominal Frequency setting, the element operates as an
underfrequency element. When the level setting is greater than the Nominal
Frequency setting, the element operates as an overfrequency element.
The relay measures system frequency for these elements using the positive
sequence voltage if the voltage input option is present. Otherwise, the relay uses
positive sequence current.

Load Control Function


Table 34 - Load Control Settings
Setting Prompt

Setting Range

Factory Default

LOAD CONTROL SEL

Off, Current, Power, TCU

Off

LD CTL CUR UPPER

Off, 0.202.00 x Ie

Off

LD CTL CUR LOWER

Off, 0.202.00 x Ie

Off

LD CTL PWR UPPER

Off, 125000 kW

Off

LD CTL PWR LOWER

Off, 125000 kW

Off

LD CTL TCU UPPER

Off, 199%TCU

Off

LD CTL TCU LOWER

Off, 199%TCU

Off

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

89

Chapter 6

Configuring Protection & Logic Functions

NOTE:

Prompt of settings LD CTL UPPER and LD CTL LOWER are dependent on the LD CONTROL SEL
setting. All possible prompts are shown in Table 34.

NOTE:

In addition to setting the Load Control levels, you must assign LD CTL UPPER and LD CTL
LOWER to auxiliary output relays (one each); see Table 43, and Figure 16 for connection
diagrams.

The 825-P provides an ability to control external devices based on parameter


Load Control Selection. You can select Current, Power, or Thermal Capacity
Utilized to operate auxiliary outputs.
When the selected parameter exceeds the level set by Load Control Upper for one
second, the assigned auxiliary relay operates. The auxiliary relay resets when the
parameter drops below the upper level setting for one second.
When the selected parameter drops below the level set by Load Control Lower
for 1 second, the assigned auxiliary relay operates. The auxiliary relay resets when
the parameter is above the lower-level setting for 1 second.
You can use this feature to control the motor load within set limits.

I/O Configuration

Analog Output
Table 35 - I/O Settings
Setting Prompt

Setting Range

Factory Default

ANALOG OUT SEL

LOAD_I, AVG_I, MAX_I, %THERM, WDG_RTD, BRG_RTD, PWR_kW, PF

LOAD_I

The expansion I/O option provides a 420 mA DC analog current output with
a variety of output parameters. Use the Analog Output Select setting to select a
parameter from the list of available options. Table 36 shows description and
scaling of the output for different parameter selections.
Table 36 - Scaling of Analog Output

90

ANALOG OUT SEL


(AOPARM)

Description

Output Scaling (4 mA)(20 mA)


(Unit)

LOAD_I

Average Load Current

0.01.0 Per Unit of FLA

AVG_I

Average Load Current

0.22.0 Per Unit of FLA

MAX_I

Maximum of the Phase currents

0.22.0 Per Unit of FLA

%THERM

Percentage Thermal Capacity

0100%TCU

WDG_RTD

Hottest Winding RTD Temperature

0250C

BRG_RTD

Hottest Bearing RTD Temperature

0250C

PWR_kW

Motor Power

0.01.0 per unit FLVA

PF

Motor Power Factor

0.8 Lag0.8 Lead

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Configuring Protection & Logic Functions

Chapter 6

Select LOAD_I to scale the analog output based on motor current if the output
is not of interest during overload conditions. Select either AVG_I or MAX_I
to scale the analog output based on motor current and if the output is required
during overload conditions.
Both LOAD_I and AVG_I use an average magnitude of three phase currents to
drive the analog output; MAX_I uses a maximum magnitude of the three phase
currents.
If the relay includes the voltage input option and you select PWR_kW parameter,
the analog output is scaled using real power. The following defines per unit
FLVA:
1 per unit FLVA := 1.732 (VNOM) (FLAn)
where:
VNOM
FLAn

=
=

Nominal voltage setting


Full Load Current setting
(n = 1, for Speed-1 or 2 for Speed-2)

If the relay includes the voltage input option and you select PF parameter, the
analog output is scaled using power factor. For power factors 0.8 lag, unity, and
0.8 lead, the analog outputs are 4 mA, 12 mA, and 20 mA, respectively.

Trip Inhibit (Block)


Table 37 - Trip Inhibit Settings
Setting Prompt

Setting Range

Factory Default

CURRENT IMBALANC

Y, N

JAM

Y, N

GROUND FAULT

Y, N

SHORT CIRCUIT

Y, N

UNDERCURRENT

Y, N

START INHIBIT

Y, N

PTC

Y, N

RTD

Y, N

NOTE:

In addition to selecting the functions to be inhibited, you must assign Block Protection to an
input. See Table 44 for a description and Figure 16 for a typical connection diagram.

With a Block Protection control input, one or more protective functions listed
in Table 37 can be inhibited when the contact closes.
During certain operational phases, when the level (e.g., motor current) differs
from the normal values, such as in the following situations.
During starting: earth fault and short-circuit protection

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

91

Chapter 6

Configuring Protection & Logic Functions

At no-load: protection against asymmetry and underload


During brief overload phases: high overload/jam
During commissioning and fault location: (localizing the source of the
trouble) the selected functions are completely disabled as long as the
control input is asserted.
No warning
No trip; no reset
Tripping delays begin to run only after the function is re-enabled.

Output Relay Behavior


Table 38 - Relay Behavior Settings
Setting Prompt

Setting Range

Factory Default

TRIP FAIL-SAFE

Y, N

AUX1 FAIL-SAFE

Y, N

AUX2 FAIL-SAFE

Y, N

AUX3 FAIL-SAFE

Y, N

AUX4 FAIL-SAFE

Y, N

AUX5 FAIL-SAFE

Y, N

AUX6 FAIL-SAFE

Y, N

The 825-P allows you to enable fail-safe output contact operation for relay
contacts on an individual basis. When contact fail-safe is enabled, the relay
output is held in its energized position when relay control power is applied
and falls to its de-energized position when control power is removed. Contact
positions with de-energized output relays are indicated on the relay chassis
(and also in Figure 4).
When Trip Output Fail-safe is enabled and the Trip contact is appropriately
connected to the motor breaker or contactor, the motor is automatically tripped
when relay control power fails. This setting/connection philosophy is appropriate
if the protected motor is more valuable than the process that the motor supports.
In critical applications where the protected motor is not more valuable than the
process, you may want the motor to run even if the relay is out of service. In this
case, disable Trip Output Fail-safe by selecting N.
In addition, you can select an auxiliary outputs to be Fail-Safe or Non-Fail-safe,
depending on your application.
ATTENTION: Pay close attention to the Trip Fail-Safe setting to ensure proper labeling
of the plug connector for terminals 95, 96, and 98.

92

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Configuring Protection & Logic Functions

Chapter 6

Timer Function
Table 39 - Timer Settings
Setting Prompt

Setting Range

Factory Default

ON DELAY T1

0240 s

OFF DELAY T1

0240 s

ON DELAY T2

0240 s

OFF DELAY T2

0240 s

NOTE:

In addition to setting the On and Off Delays, you must assign TIMER1 and/or TIMER2 to a
control input (see Table 44). You must also assign TIMER1T and/or TIMER2T to auxiliary
output relays. See Table 43 for detail.

When you assign an input contact and an output auxiliary relay to appropriate
parameters of Timer Function, the output responds to the change in input
contact with the characteristics shown in Figure 33.
This feature has the following application examples:
Time-graded switching on and off
Delaying the transfer of alarm and trip messages
Figure 33 - Operating Characteristics of Timer Functions
T on

Control Input
TIMER

Output
Relay Word
TIMER nT

T off
T on = On-delay
T off = Off-delay
n = 1 or 2

Control Input
On-Delay
(T off = 0) T on
Off-Delay
(T on = 0)
On-Off-Delay

T off
T on

T off
T off

On-Off-Delay

T on

Front Panel Settings


Table 40 - Front Panel Settings
Setting Prompt

Setting Range

Factory Default

LCD TIMEOUT

Off, 130 min

15

LCD CONTRAST

18

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

93

Chapter 6

Configuring Protection & Logic Functions

The LCD TIMEOUT indicates the duration of inactivity before the LCD
backlight will extinguish, the Access Level will be automatically reset and the
present function will be automatically terminated. Use the front panel LCD
Timeout setting as a security measure. If the display is within an Access Level 2
function, such as the relay setting entry, the function is automatically terminated
(without saving changes) after inactivity for this length of time. The front-panel
display returns to the default display (see Table 41 for the default rotating display
settings).
If you prefer to disable the front-panel timeout function during relay testing, set
the LCD Timeout equal to 0 minutes. Use the front panel LCD Contrast setting
to adjust the contrast of the liquid crystal display.

Display Enable
Table 41 - Display Enable Settings
Setting Prompt

Setting Range

Factory Default

TIME & DATE

Y, N

GROUND CURRENT

Y, N

CURRENT IMBALANC

Y, N

FREQUENCY

Y, N

THERM CAP USED

Y, N

RTD TEMPERATURE

Y, N

VOLTAGE IMBALANC

Y, N

POWER

Y, N

The relay default front-panel rotating display shows unit identifiers (see Table 7)
and magnitudes of measured phase currents and, if included, phase-to-phase
voltages.
The Display Enable settings give you the option to add quantities listed in
Table 41 to the default display. When you select Y for a quantity, it is added
to the rotating display.
Voltage Imbalance and Power displays require the voltage input option. When
the relay is equipped with external RTD inputs and the Display Enable RTD
Temperature setting equals Y, the relay displays the temperatures of the hottest
winding, bearing, and other RTDs, plus the ambient temperature.

94

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Configuring Protection & Logic Functions

Chapter 6

I/O Assignments
Trip Relay I/O
Table 42 - Trip Relay Assignments
Setting Prompt

TRIP A

Overload
X

Undercurrent
X

Jam
X

Current Imbalance
X

Short Circuit
X

RTD (Winding/Bearing)
X

PTC
X

TRIP B

Underpower
X

Undervoltage
X

Overvoltage
X

Phase Reversal
X

Power Factor
X

Speed Switch
X

Frequency 1
X

Frequency 2
X

RTD (Other)
X

RTD (Ambient)
X

PTC Error
X

RTD Error
X

MCM Error
Comm Idle

Comm Loss
X

Remote Trip
X

Comm Fault
X

Reserved
X

Reserved
X

Reserved
X

NOTE:

Ground Fault (Core Balance)


Start Time

TRIP D

Ground Fault (Residual)


VAR

TRIP C

Description

Reserved

The 825-P uses settings TRIPA through TRIPD and setting TRIP FAIL-SAFE (see Table 38)
to determine the operation of the Trip Output.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

95

Chapter 6

Configuring Protection & Logic Functions

The 825-P allows mapping of protection trip elements to the trip output.
Table 42 shows the method of mapping elements using Relay Word bits
associated with elements. Select 1 for each element you want to map using the
TRIPA through TRIPD settings. The relay will OR them together to drive the
Trip output. A logical OR describes when any one assigned element asserts,
the Trip relay will operate.

Auxiliary I/O
Table 43 - Aux Assignments
Setting Prompt

Aux# A

Overload
X

Undercurrent
X

Jam
X

Current Imbalance
X

Short Circuit
X

RTD (Winding/Bearing)
X

PTC
X

Aux# B

Underpower
X

Undervoltage
X

Overvoltage
X

Phase Reversal
X

Power Factor
X

Speed Switch
X

Ground Fault (Core Balance)


Start Time

Frequency 1
X

Frequency 2
X

RTD (Other)
X

RTD (Ambient)
X

PTC Error
X

RTD Error
X

96

Ground Fault (Residual)


VAR

Aux# C

Description

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

MCM Error

Configuring Protection & Logic Functions

Chapter 6

Table 43 - Aux Assignments


Setting Prompt

Aux# D

Comm Idle
X

Comm Loss
X

Remote Trip
X

Comm Fault
X

Latch Trip
X

Reserved
X

Reserved
X

Aux# E

Undercurrent Warning
X

Jam Warning
X

Current Imbalance Warning


X

RTD (Winding/Bearing) Warning


X

Power Factor Warning


X

Ground Fault (Core Balance) Warning


X

Ground Fault (Residual) Warning


VAR Warning

Underpower Warning
X

Undervoltage Warning
X

Overvoltage Warning
X

Speed Switch Warning


X

Frequency 1 Warning
X

Frequency 2 Warning
X

Aux# G

Reserved
Overload Warning

Aux# F

Description

RTD (Other) Warning


RTD (Ambient) Warning

Setting Warning
X

General Warning
X

Load Control Upper


X

Load Control Lower


X

Timer 1
X

Timer 2
X

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Short Circuit Warning

97

Chapter 6

Configuring Protection & Logic Functions

Table 43 - Aux Assignments


Setting Prompt

Aux# H

Description
Stopped State

Running State
X

Starting State
X

Star (Wye) Starting State


X

Delta Starting State


X

Start Command
X

Network Control
X

Reserved

NOTE:

The 825-P uses settings AUX# A through AUX# H and setting AUX# FAIL-SAFE in the output
logic (see Table 38 for more details) to determine the operation of the corresponding
auxiliary.

NOTE:

The AUX# A through AUX# D bytes are used to map trip functions to the output. The AUX# E
through AUX# H bytes are used to map warning and status functions to the output.

The 825-P allows mapping of protection (trip and warning) and general-purpose
control elements to the auxiliary outputs. Table 43 shows the method of mapping
the elements using Relay Word bits associated with the elements, except the
NETWORK, which is described below. Select 1 for each element you want to
map using the AUX# A through AUX# H settings. The relay will OR them
together to drive the Aux1 output.
By default, the trip protection assignments are unlatched. The 825-P with
firmware revision 4.01 and higher can latch the trip protection assignment by
setting bit 4 in Aux #D. The user must reset the 825-P with the front Test/Reset
button or through communications to reset the auxiliary output.
If NETWORK is mapped to an AUX output, the DeviceNet network can
control the output. The DeviceNet can individually control those Auxiliary
outputs with NETWORK mapped to them.

98

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Configuring Protection & Logic Functions

Chapter 6

Input I/O
Table 44 - Input Assignments
Setting Prompt

IN#

Description
Emergency Start

Disable Settings
X

Trip Reset
X

Timer 1
X

Timer 2
X

Speed Switch
X

Block Protection
X

Speed 2
X

Breaker/Contactor Auxiliary
X

Remote Trip

NOTE:

The 825-P allows one control function to an input and one input to a control function (see
Table 5).

NOTE:

In addition to setting an Input Assignment, you must connect a control contact to the input
(see Figure 16 for a typical connection diagram).

The 825-P provides the ability to assign a control function to each control input.
Table 44 shows the available control functions and the method of assigning them.
When a control input is asserted, the 825-P performs the control action assigned
to the input. The control action of each of the available functions is described
below:
Table 45 - Control Actions
Function

Control Action

Emergency Start

Overrides all active start inhibits, clears the % TCU to zero and immediately
initiates a motor start.

Disable Settings

Disables all settings changes from the front panel, serial port, and DeviceNet
network; when this input is asserted, you can view the settings but you cannot
change them. Disables the Test/Reset push button function.

Trip Reset

Resets the Trip output and front-panel Trip LED, provided there is no trip condition
present (including start inhibit lockouts).

TIMER1 (Timer 1 Input)

Provides input to Timer1 Function (see Figure 33 for more details.

TIMER2 (Timer 2 Input)

Provides input to Timer2 Function (see Figure 33 for more details).

Speed Switch

Provides input to Speed Switch Protection Function. See Speed Switch (Stalling
During Start) on page82 for more details.

Block Protection

Inhibits selected protection functions when the input is asserted. See Table 37 for
more details.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

99

Chapter 6

Configuring Protection & Logic Functions

Table 45 - Control Actions

Logic Explanation

Speed 2

When the SPEED2 control input is asserted and Two Speed Enable setting is Y the
825-P selects second values for the settings. See Table 11 for a full description of
various settings.
Use the SPEED2 input for two-speed motor applications. You can also use this
input to change the settings in applications where ambient temperature varies
appreciably (e.g., exposed water pumps with different capacities during daytime
and at night).

Breaker/Contactor Auxiliary

Use input if motors have an operational idling current of less than 20% FLA. Use
the auxiliary contact of motor contactor or another contact, which indicates that
the motor is switched on. The relay uses this input information to correctly
determine the Motor State (Running verses Stopped), particularly important
during periods of low idling current.

Remote Trip

Use this input to trip the motor by remote protection or a control device (e.g.,
vibration switch and pressure switch).

Stop/Trip Logic
The 825-P tripping logic is designed to trip or stop motors energized through
circuit breakers or contactors. Trip relay contacts 95/96 are designed for the
purpose of being applied in motor control circuits. The relay logic lets you define
the conditions that cause a trip and the performance of the trip relay output
contacts.

Initiate Trip
The 825-P Trip Logic offers two ways to stop the protected motor:
Trip Output Assignments.
Serial Port or Network STOP Command.
Either of these two conditions triggers an event report. The relay controls the
Trip output contacts, depending on the relay behavior setting Trip Fail-Safe.
Assign the protection element Relay Word bits that you want to cause the relay to
trip to the Trip output (see Table 42).

Unlatch Trip
Following a fault, the trip condition is maintained until all of the following
conditions are true:
0.5 second minimum trip duration time passes.
a trip reset command is received as follows:
an Auto Reset bit from Overload, RTD, or PTC protection elements
asserts.
a rising edge of the Target Reset control bit (from control input, front
panel, serial port, network, or Emergency Start) is detected.
all the motor lockout functions, described below, de-assert.
100

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Configuring Protection & Logic Functions

Chapter 6

The relay automatically locks out the trip relay by asserting the trip signal under
any of the following start-inhibiting conditions:
Restart (Anti-backspin) Block
The restart block timer has not expired since the motor trip occurred. The
trip condition is maintained until the timer expires.
Minimum Time Between Starts Lockout
A new start is not permitted until after the minimum time between starts
has passed. The trip condition is maintained until a start is permitted.
Starts-Per-Hour Limit Lockout
If the starts-per-hour limit has been met, a new start is not permitted until
60 minutes after the oldest start. The trip condition is maintained until a
start is permitted.
TCU Start Inhibit
The motor thermal element % Thermal Capacity value is too high to
permit a normal motor start without tripping. The trip condition is
maintained until the % Thermal Capacity decreases to a level where a start
can safely take place.
If any of the above protection functions is not enabled by the relay settings, that
function does not affect trip unlatch.
Also note that the relay automatically asserts the trip signal if the motor stops and
a lockout condition is true. The trip signal is maintained until all the enabled
motor lockout conditions are satisfied.
Trips initiated by the serial port command or by network operation are
maintained for at least 0.5 second.

Start & Emergency Restart Logic


If the Trip output contact is not asserted, the relay asserts the START Relay Word
bit in response to any of the following conditions:
the Emergency Restart Relay Word bit asserts.
you execute the STR serial port command or a DeviceNet Start Motor
control command.
The START Relay Word bit remains asserted for 0.5 seconds, unless the relay
trips. If the relay trips before the 0.5 second timer expires, the relay resets the
timer, clearing the START Relay Word bit.
In an emergency, it could be necessary to quickly start the motor even though
a protection lockout condition exists and is holding the Trip output contact
asserted. The lockout might be a result of the thermal element or another
protection function. You can override all of the lockout conditions using the
Emergency Restart function.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

101

Chapter 6

Configuring Protection & Logic Functions

The relay asserts the Emergency Restart bit in response to any of the following
conditions:
the control input assigned to Emergency Restart asserts.
the relay receives a network Emergency Restart control command.
When the Emergency Restart bit asserts, the relay does the following:
Resets the motor thermal element capacity used to 0%.
Manipulates the Starts-Per-Hour, Minimum Time Between Starts, and
Anti-backspin functions to permit an immediate start.
De-asserts the Trip output contact if a fault detecting element is not
picked up.
Initiates a motor start.

102

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Configuring Protection & Logic Functions

Chapter 6

Overload Curves
Figure 34 - Thermal Overload Curves
100000

Trip times are for cold


(ambient) motor, without preload.
Relay Settings
Service Factor, SF = 1.01
Acceleration Factor, TD = 1.00
Run State Time Constant, RTC = Auto
Motor LRC = 6.0 Ie

10000

Trip Time in Seconds

Locked Rotor Time


(in seconds)

1000
600
400
200
100

100
50
25

10

10
5

1
1

6 7 8 9 10

Multiples of Full Load Amps

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

103

Chapter 6

104

Configuring Protection & Logic Functions

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter

Metering & Monitoring

Overview

The 825-P relay includes metering functions to display the present values of
current, voltage (if included), and RTD measurements (from the external 825PR12D Module). The relay provides the following methods to read the present
meter values:
Rotating front panel display
Front panel menu
Front panel EIA-232 serial port
Network port (if installed)
Analog output
For monitoring and preventive maintenance purposes, the 825-P provides a
motor operating statistics report, available using either the front panel, the serial
port, or the optional network port.

Metering

The 825-P meter data falls into the following categories:


Instantaneous metering
Thermal metering
Thermal model metering
RTD metering
Note that the phases and neutral are identified by 1, 2, 3, N for currents and A, B,
C, N for voltages.
Table 46 details each of the meter data types in the 825-P. Chapter 3: Front Panel
Operation and Chapter 5: Using MPS Explorer describe how to access the
various types of meter data using the relay front-panel and communications ports.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

105

Chapter 7

Metering & Monitoring

Instantaneous Metering
Table 46 - Measured Values
Relay Option

Meter Values

All Models

Line Currents L1, L2, and L3


IN (Core-Balance Ground Fault Current) magnitudes (A) and phase angles ()
IG (Residual Ground Fault Current) magnitude (A) and phase angle ()
IM (Average Current Magnitude)
Average Motor Load (x Ie)
Current Imbalance %
System Frequency (Hz)

With Voltage Option

VAB, VBC, VCA or VAN, VBN, VCN, VG magnitudes (V) and phase angles ()
Average Voltage (L-L or L-N)
Voltage Imbalance %
Real Power (kW)
Reactive Power (kVAR)
Apparent Power (kVA)
Power Factor
Real Energy (MWh)
Reactive Energy (MvARh)
Apparent Energy (MvAh)

All angles are displayed between 180+180. Delta-connected PT angles are


referenced to VAB or L1 and wye-connected PT angles are referenced to VAN or
L1. If the voltage channels are not supported or if VAB < 13V (for Delta) or
VAN < 13V (for Wye), PT angles are referenced to L1 current.

Thermal Metering
The thermal metering function reports the present values of the RTD input
temperatures and several quantities related to the motor overload protection
function (Table 47).
Table 47 - Thermal Meter Values
Relay Option

Thermal Values

All Models

Average Motor Load (x Ie)


Thermal Capacity Used %
Time to Trip (s)
Time to Reset (min)
Starts Available

With External 825-PR12D Module

All RTD Temperatures


RTD % Thermal Capacity

NOTE:

106

If the Overload Protection is disabled, the relay always reports % Thermal Capacity = 999
and Calculated Time to Thermal Trip (s) = 9999.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Metering & Monitoring

Chapter 7

The thermal meter function also reports the state of connected RTDs if any have
failed. Table 48 shows failure messages.
Table 48 - RTD Input Status Messages

Power Measurement
Conventions

Message

Status

Open

RTD leads open

Short

RTD leads shorted

Comm Fail

Fiber-optic communications to 825-PR12D Module have failed

Stat Fail

825-PR12D Module self-test status failure

The 825-P uses the IEEE convention for power measurement assuming motor
action. The implications of this convention are shown in Figure 35.
Figure 35 - Complex Power Measurement Conventions
Source
Bus

Direction of
Positive Real Power

Motor

825-P
Relay

I lags V
W=
VAR = +
PF = LEAD

Q+ (VAR)

I lags V
W = + Power Into Motor
VAR = +
PF = LAG

P+ (W)

I leads V
W=
VAR =
PF = LAG

I leads V
W=+
VAR =
PF = LEAD

In the 825-P, reported positive real power is always into the motor.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

107

Chapter 7

Metering & Monitoring

Motor Operating Statistics

The 825-P retains useful machine operating statistics information regarding the
protected motor.

NOTE:

While the relay power is off, the elapsed timers do not advance. If relay power is off for a
significant amount of time, the elapsed calendar time does not match the elapsed time
recorded by the relay.

The motor operating statistics include motor operating history, such as time
running, time stopped, percent time running (of total time), number of starts,
and number of emergency starts.

108

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter

Analyzing Events

Overview

The 825-P relay provides several facilities to analyze the cause of relay trip
operations. Use these tools to help diagnose the cause of the relay trip operation
and more quickly restore the protected motor to service.
Each tool listed below provides increasing detail regarding the causes of a relay
operation.
Event Summary Reports
Serialized Events Recording

Event Summary Reports

Each time the 825-P trips and in response to other selected conditions, it captures
motor current and voltage (if included). This collection of data is called an event
summary report. This section explains what causes the relay to save an event
summary report, and what the event summary data means.
The relay stores the five most recent event summary reports in nonvolatile
memory. These reports are numbered 1 through 5. When the relay stores a new
report, it discards the oldest report if five reports are already in memory. Use the
event summary data to help discern the cause of relay trip operations.
View the present collection of event summary reports using the front panel
Events menu selection or the serial port. Each event summary report includes the
following information:
Type of event, from the list of event type strings in Figure 24
Event number, date, and time
Magnitudes of the line, core balance, and residual currents
Magnitudes of the line-to-neutral (wye) or phase-to-phase voltages (delta),
if included

Report Triggering
The 825-P triggers an event summary report when the relay trips by protection
elements.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

109

Chapter 8

Analyzing Events

Current and Voltage Columns


Table 49 summarizes the event summary report current and voltage columns.
Table 49 - Event Report Current and Voltage Columns

Serialized Events
Recording (SER) Report

Column Heading

Definition

L1

Current measured by channel L1 (primary A)

L2

Current measured by channel L2 (primary A)

L3

Current measured by channel L3 (primary A)

RES

Residual current (L1 + L2 + L3, primary A)

CB

Current measured by channel IN (primary A)

VAN or VAB

Voltage measured by channel VAN or VAB (primary V)

VBN or VBC

Voltage measured by channel VBN or VBC (primary V)

VCN or VCA

Voltage measured by channel VCN or calculated from VAB and VBC (primary V)

VG

Zero-sequence voltage (VAN + VBN + VCN, primary V)

SER Triggering
The 825-P relay stores an entry in the SER report for a change of state of any
one of the elements listed in Table112 on page235 and Table113 on page238.
The relay saves up to 512 records in nonvolatile memory.
The relay adds the following message to the SER to indicate power up or settings
change conditions:
Relay newly powered up or settings changed
Each entry in the SER includes SER row number, date, time, element
name, and element state

110

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Analyzing Events

Example Reports

Chapter 8

Event Summary Report


The example event summary report in Figure 36 corresponds to the example
Serialized Events Recording (SER) report in Figure 37.
Figure 36 - Example Event Summary Report
=>SUM <Enter>
825-P Modular
14:50:06:032

Date: 06/07/2003

Time:

Prot. System
Event #: 1

Event: No Trip

Event Date: 06/07/2003

Event Time: 14:39:47:907

L1
CURRENT MAG (A):

L2
259.7

VAN
VOLTAGE MAG L-N (V):

L3
191.6

VBN

458

RES
190.6

VCN

460

CB
0.1

68.2

VG

457

456

Serialized Events Recording (SER) Report


The example SER report in Figure 37 includes records of events that occurred
before the beginning of the event summary report in Figure 36. The SER event
report rows are explained in Table 50, numbered in correspondence to the Item #
column.
Figure 37 - Example SER Report
=>SER <Enter>
825-P Modular

Date: 07/07/2003 Time: 14:50:04.744

Prot. System
FID=825-Modular xxxx-Vxxxx-Zxxxxxx-Dxxxxxxxxx
#

DATE

TIME

ELEMENT

STATE

11

06/07/2003

14:34:32.786

STOPPED

Deasserted

10

06/07/2003

14:34:32.786

STARTING

Asserted

06/07/2003

14:34:42.795

RUNNING

Asserted

06/07/2003

14:34:42.795

STARTING

Deasserted

06/07/2003

14:39:45.398

AMBALRM

Asserted

06/07/2003

14:39:47.907

AMBTRIP

Asserted

06/07/2003

14:39:47.907

TRIP

Asserted

06/07/2003

14:39:48.007

AMBTRIP

Deasserted

06/07/2003

14:39:48.007

AMBALRM

Deasserted

06/07/2003

14:39:48.028

STOPPED

Asserted

06/07/2003

14:39:48.028

RUNNING

Deasserted

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

111

Chapter 8

Analyzing Events

Table 50 - Example SER Report Explanations

112

Item #

Explanation

11, 10, 9, 8, 7

After a 10-second accelerating time, the motor relay indicates the motor is running (9).
Later, the ambient temperature alarm element asserts.

6, 5

The ambient temperature trip element times out, causing the relay to trip. Trip
is asserted.

4, 3

Declining temperature allows the elements to drop out.

2, 1

As the current continues to drop, the relay declares the motor stopped.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter

825-PDN DeviceNet Communication Card

Introduction

The 825-PDN DeviceNet Communication Card is an optional accessory that


enables connection of the 825-P Modular Protection System to the DeviceNet
automation network. The card occupies the communication expansion slot
(Slot C) in the 825-P Modular Protection System.
Figure 38 - 825-P Modular Protection System Back Panel View

Communication Expansion Slot

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

113

Chapter 9

825-PDN DeviceNet Communication Card

Figure 39 - 825-PDN Component Overview

Table 51 - Part Descriptions


Part
#

114

Description

DeviceNet Connector

Accepts a 5-pin linear DeviceNet plug.

Bus Status LED

Status indicator for backplane communications.

Network Status LED

Status indicator for DeviceNet communications.

Node Address Switch

Rotary switch for setting the most significant digit (MSD)


of node address.

Node Address Switch

Rotary switch for setting the least significant digit (LSD)


of node address.

Data Rate Switch

Rotary switch for selecting the DeviceNet data rate at which


the card communicates.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

825-PDN DeviceNet Communication Card

Features

Chapter 9

The 825-P DeviceNet Communication Card features the following:


The card receives the required power from the DeviceNet network.
Rotary switches let you set the node address and network data rate prior to
mounting in the 825-P Modular Protection System and applying power.
Alternatively, the switches can be set to positions that allow for
configuration of these settings over the DeviceNet network, utilizing a
network configuration tool such as RSNetWorx for DeviceNet.
Status indicators report the status of the device bus and network
communications. They are visible from the back panel of the 825-P
Modular Protection System as installed.
UCMM (Unconnected Message Manager) messages are supported with
the ability to allocate up to 3 explicit message connections concurrently.
DeviceNet Group 2 slave functionality including:
Explicit connection
Polled connection
1 COS (Change of State)/Cyclic connection
Full DeviceNet Parameter Object support allows EDS files to be extracted
from all units.
Settings are provided for user-defined behavior of the 825-P Modular
Protection System auxiliary relays for Comm Fault and Comm Idle
conditions.
Group 4 faulted node recovery is supported. You can configure a device
even when it is faulted on the network if the configuration tool supports
faulted node recovery.
DeviceLogix component technology provides the capability to perform
logic operations at the device level. A total of 80 function blocks are
supported.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

115

Chapter 9

825-PDN DeviceNet Communication Card

Required Equipment

Equipment Shipping with the Card


When you unpack the card, verify that the package includes:
One DeviceNet communication card
One five-pin linear DeviceNet plug
Two labels that the installer affixes to the 825-P Modular Protection
System, one to the top and one to the back panel
825-P Option Card installation instructions

User-Supplied Equipment
Small slotted screwdriver (0.6 x 3.5 mm)
DeviceNet cable, a thin cable with outside diameter of 6.9 mm (0.27 in.),
is recommended
Configuration tool (e.g., RSNetWorx for DeviceNet)
Computer with an installed DeviceNet communication adapter
825-P User Manual

Wiring

1. Remove power from the DeviceNet network and 825-P Modular


Protection System relay
2. Use static control precautions
3. Connect a DeviceNet cable to the network
4. Terminate the bare leads of the DeviceNet cable to the 5-pin linear plug
as illustrated in Figure 40

116

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

825-PDN DeviceNet Communication Card

Chapter 9

Figure 40 - Connecting 5-Pin Linear Plug to DeviceNet Cable

Table 52 - Linear Plug Function Descriptions


Terminal

Color

Signal

Function

Red

V+

Power Supply

White

Can_H

Signal High

Bare

SHIELD

Shield

Blue

CAN_L

Signal Low

Black

V-

Common

5. Connect the wired 5-pin linear plug to the 825-PDN DeviceNet


Communication Card, securing with the two screws

Node Commissioning

The 825-PDN DeviceNet Communication Card is shipped with a default


software node address (MAC ID) setting of 63 and the data rate set to Autobaud.
Each device on a DeviceNet network must have a unique node address which can
be set to a value from 0 to 63.
Keep in mind that most DeviceNet systems use address 0 for the master device
(Scanner) and node address 63 should be left vacant for introduction of new slave
devices.
The node address and data rate for the 825-PDN DeviceNet Communication
Card can be changed using software or by setting the hardware switches that
reside on the card. While both methods yield the same result, it is a good practice
to choose one method and deploy it throughout the system.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

117

Chapter 9

825-PDN DeviceNet Communication Card

Setting the Hardware Switches


Use the following steps to commission the card:
1. Set the node address switches.
Figure 41 - Node Address and Data Rate Setting Switches

Table 53 - Node Address MAC ID Setting


Switch Setting
063

Node address setting determined by switch values when set in this range.
MSD = most significant digit
LSD = least significant digit

6499

For switch settings in this range, node address setting is determined by the
software setting using the RSNetWorx for DeviceNet configuration tool.

99

118

Description

Factory default setting.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

825-PDN DeviceNet Communication Card

Chapter 9

2. Set the data rate switches.


Table 54 - Data Rate Setting
Switch Setting

Description

125 K

250 K

500 K

39

For a switch setting in this range, data rate setting is determined by the
software setting using the RSNetWorx for DeviceNet configuration tool.
Note: The card is factory default set to autobaud to the network data rate.

Factory default setting.

3. Cycle power to the card to initialize the new settings.

Using RSNetWorx for DeviceNet


Follow these steps if the hardware switches are left in the factory default settings
or in the range of 6499 for the node address and 39 for the data rate. To begin
the configuration of the 825-P Modular Protection System using software,
execute the RSNetWorx software and complete the following procedure. You
must use RSNetWorx Revision 3.21 Service Pack 2 or later.
1. After going on-line using RSNetWorx for DeviceNet, do the following:
Select the Network menu.
Select Online.
2. Choose the appropriate DeviceNet PC interface. In this example, a
1784-PCIDS module is chosen. Other common DeviceNet interfaces
are the 1770-KFD, and 1784-PCD.

NOTE:

DeviceNet drivers must be configured using RSLinx prior to being available to RSNetWorx.

3. Select OK.
4. RSNetWorx notifies the user to upload or download devices before
viewing configuration. Select OK.
5. RSNetWorx now browses the network and displays all of the nodes it has
detected on the network. For some versions of RSNetWorx software, the
825-P Modular Protection System EDS files and icon might not be
included, and the device could be identified as an unregistered device.
If the screen appears like in Figure 42, continue with Registering
an EDS file.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

119

Chapter 9

825-PDN DeviceNet Communication Card

Figure 42 - Network Online Screen

6. If RSNetWorx recognizes the device as an 825-P Modular Protection


System, skip ahead to the section Using the Node Commissioning Tool
of RSNetWorx for DeviceNet.

Registering an EDS File


Download the 825-P DeviceNet EDS from the Internet at http://
www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/support/networks/
eds.page?
Use the RSLinx Classic EDS Hardware Installation tool to register the new
EDS file.

120

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

825-PDN DeviceNet Communication Card

Chapter 9

Using the Node Commissioning Tool of RSNetWorx for DeviceNet


1. From the Tools menu at the top of the screen, select Node
Commissioning.
2. To prompt a screen similar to Figure 43, select Browse.
Figure 43 - Node Commissioning Device Solution Window

Explicit Messaging

The 825-PDN is capable of using explicit messages to retrieve data that is not
automatically acquired based on the input and output assembly of the device.
The example shows how to configure an explicit message with a ControlLogix
processor.
To assist in the development of the example, the network consists only of the
825-P Modular Protection System and scanner. Therefore, the only mapped
information in the scanner is the 825-P Modular Protection System.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

121

Chapter 9

825-PDN DeviceNet Communication Card

The following example utilizes the input and output assemblies of 50 and 2.
The tables below list the data configuration for the ControlLogix platform and
include the Tag Name as used in the example program.
Table 55 - Example ControlLogix Input Addressing (produced assembly)
Instance 50 ODVA Overload
Byte

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Address

Local:1:I.
Data[1].7

Local:1:I.
Data[1].6

Local:1:I.
Data[1].5

Local:1:I.
Data[1].4

Local:1:I.
Data[1].3

Local:1:I.
Data[1].2

Local:1:I.
Data[1].1

Local:1:I.
Data[1].0

Tag Name
0

Status_Fault
Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Fault

Table 56 - Example ControlLogix Output Address (consumed assembly)


Instance 2 ODVA Overload
Byte

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Address

Local:1:O.
Data[1].7

Local:1:O.
Data[1].6

Local:1:O.
Data[1].5

Local:1:O.
Data[1].4

Local:1:O.
Data[1].3

Local:1:O.
Data[1].2

Local:1:O.
Data[1].1

Local:1:O.
Data[1].0

Reserved

Reserved

Tag Name
0

Control_fault
Reset
Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

Flt Reset

The explicit message Request and Response is configured within the MSG
function. The MSG function can be found in the Input/Output tab of RSLogix
5000. Note that in the ControlLogix program example, rung 6 is the only
required logic to complete the explicit message request.
Table 57 - MSG Function Illustration

Setting Up the MSG instruction


A tag name must be given to the MSG function before the rest of the information
can be defined. In this example a tag was created with the name explicit_mess.
After the instruction has been named, click on the gray box to define the rest of
the instruction.
See Figure 58 as an example that shows the exact data format to perform a Get
Attribute Single request. This message specifically accesses parameter 104, Phase

122

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

825-PDN DeviceNet Communication Card

Chapter 9

CT Ratio. See Table 59, Common Configuration Examples for 825-P Modular
Protection System for additional configurations.
Table 58 - Message Configuration

Table 59 - Description of Message Configuration Fields


Field

Description

Message Type

Select CIP Generic from pull-down menu to configure an explicit message.

Destination
Element

Tag name of the location you are going to place the response information. In this example
a tag was created with the name explicit_data.

Service Type

Pull-down menu has several options, however only the Get Attribute Single is used for this
example. The Class, Instance, and Attribute define the actual information being requested.
Additional configurations of these parameters can be found in Appendix B.

Class

In this example, the value is F.

Instance

In this example, the value is 104.

Attribute

In this example, the value is 1.

After the above information has been entered, click on the communication tab
Path

Path defines the route the message takes to get to the device it is intended for. In this
example the path is Scanner,2,4; where scanner is the name of the 1756-DNB in the rack,
2 represents the DeviceNet port, and 4 represents the physical node address of the 825-P
Modular Protection System.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

123

Chapter 9

825-PDN DeviceNet Communication Card

Figure 44 - Scanner Path

DeviceLogix

DeviceLogix is a stand-alone Boolean program, which resides within the


825-PDN DeviceNet Communication Card. The program is embedded
in the product software so there is no additional module required to use
this technology, however RSNetWorx for DeviceNet is required to program
the device.
In addition to the actual programming, DeviceLogix can be configured to
operate under specific situations. It is important to note that the DeviceLogix
program only runs if the logic has been enabled. This can be done within the
Logic Editor of RSNetWorx. The operation configuration is accomplished
by setting the Network Override and Communication Override parameter.
The following information describes the varying levels of operation:
If both overrides are disabled and the logic is enabled, the only time
DeviceLogix runs is if there is an active I/O connection with a master, i.e.,
the master is in Run mode. At all other times, DeviceLogix is running the
logic, but does not control the status of the outputs.
If the Network Override is enabled and the logic is enabled, then
DeviceLogix controls the state of the outputs when the PLC is in Run
mode and if a network fault such as Duplicate MAC ID or Module Bus
off condition occurs.

124

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

825-PDN DeviceNet Communication Card

Chapter 9

If the Communications Override is enabled and the logic is enabled the


device does not need any I/O connection to run the logic. As long as there
is control power and a DeviceNet power source connected to the device,
the logic controls the status of the outputs.
DeviceLogix has many applications and the implementation is typically only
limited to the imagination of the programmer. Keep in mind that the application
of DeviceLogix is only designed to handle simple logic routines.
DeviceLogix is programmed using simple Boolean math operators, such as AND,
OR, NOT, timers, counters, and latches. Decision making is made by combining
these Boolean operations with any of the available I/O. The inputs and outputs
used to interface with the logic can come from the network or from the device
hardware. Hardware I/O is the physical Inputs and Outputs located on the device
such as push buttons and pilot lights that are connected to the 825-P Modular
Protection System.
There are many reasons to use the DeviceLogix functionality, but some of the
most common are listed below:
Increased system reliability
Improved diagnostics and reduced troubleshooting
Operation independent of PLC or Network status
Continue to run process in the event of network interruptions
Critical operations can be safely shutdown through local logic

DeviceLogix Programming Example


The following example shows how to program a simple logic routine to interface
the 825-P Modular Protection System with a remote hard-wired tower light and a
reset button. In this case, the I/O is wired as shown in the table.

IMPORTANT

Before programming logic, it is important to decide on the conditions under which the
logic run. As defined earlier, the conditions can be defined by setting parameter 8
(Network Override) and parameter 9 (Comm Override) to the value that you want.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

125

Chapter 9

825-PDN DeviceNet Communication Card

Table 60 - Hardware Bit Assignments and Description for the 825-P Modular Protection System
Input Table

Output Table

Bit

Description

Bit

Description

Input 2

Reset Button

Flt Reset

Reset Overload

Output 5

Tower Light

1. While in RSNetWorx for DeviceNet, double-click 825-P Modular


Protection System.
2. Select tab DeviceLogix.
3. If you are on-line with a device, in the dialog box that appears asking you to
upload or download, select Upload.
4. Select Start Logic Editor.
5. Do one of the following:
If programming off-line, continue to next step.
Do the following:
a. If not programming off-line, select Edit.
b. When asked if you want to enter edit mode, select Yes. In edit
mode, the entire list of function blocks is displayed in the toolbar.
6. Left-click the AND function block.
7. Move your cursor into the grid.
8. Left-click to drop the function onto the grid.
9. From the toolbar, select Discrete Input Point.
10. From the pull-down menu, select Input 2. This is the remote Reset button
that is based on the I/O table example.
11. Drag the input to the left of the AND function.
12. To drop the input on the page, left-click on the position that you want.
13. Position your cursor over the tip of Input 2. The pin tip turns green.
14. Click on the pin tip when it turns green.
15. Move your cursor toward the input of the AND function. A line follows
the cursor. When a connection can be made, the tip of the AND function
also turns green.
16. Click on Input. The line is drawn from Input 2 to the Input 1 of the AND
function.
NOTE:

If this was not a valid connection, one of the pin tips would have turned red rather than
green. Double-clicking on the unused portion of the grid or pressing Esc at any time cancels
the connection process.

17. From the toolbar, select Module Status Point.

126

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

825-PDN DeviceNet Communication Card

Chapter 9

18. From the pull-down menu, select Fault.


19. Place the input to the left of the AND function.
20. Connect the input to the Input 2 of the AND latch.
21. From the toolbar, select Network Output Point.
22. From the pull-down menu, select Flt Reset.
23. Select OK.
24. Moving your cursor into the grid, place the Output to the right of the
AND function block.
25. Connect the Output of the AND function block to Flt Reset.
Figure 45 - DeviceLogix Logic Editor Screen

26. From the toolbar. select Discrete Output Point.


27. From the pull-down menu, select Aux Out 5. This is the tower light output
listed in the I/O table example.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

127

Chapter 9

825-PDN DeviceNet Communication Card

28. Select OK.


29. Moving cursor into the grid, place Aux Out 5 to the right of the AND
function block
30. Correct the Fault Input to the Aux Out 5.
31. Do one of the following:
In the toolbar, select Tools.
From the pull-down menu, select Logic Verify.
32. To toggle out of edit mode if you are online with a device, select Tools.
33. After selecting Edit from the main menu, select Download from the pulldown menu (right corner of the toolbar).
NOTE:

The PLC key switch must be in the Program position. If not, the download does not occur and
a generated error occurs.

34. When the download is successful, select OK.


35. From the same pull-down menu, select Logic Enable On.
36. The 825-P Modular Protection System is now programmed and the logic
is active.

128

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

825-PDN DeviceNet Communication Card

Parameter Groups

Chapter 9

The 825-PDN Device Communication Card contains five parameter groups.


The parameters shown in the DeviceLogix Parameters, DeviceNet Parameters,
Aux. Output Parameters, Misc. Parameter, and Status Parameters are discussed
in this section.
A complete list of all DeviceNet parameters is described in Appendix B.

Status Parameters

DeviceNet
Parameters

Aux. Output
Parameters

Misc. Parameters
Set To Defaults

DeviceLogix
Parameters

Hdw Inputs

Autobaud Enable

GrpA Pr FltState

Net Inputs 1

Hdw Outputs

Consumed IO Assy

GrpA Pr FltValue

Net Inputs 2

Trip Status 1

Produced IO Assy

GrpA DN FltState

Net Outputs

Trip Status 2

Prod Assy Word 0

GrpA DN FltValue

Network Override

Warn Status 1

Prod Assy Word 1

GrpA DN IdlState

Comm Override

Warn Status 2

Prod Assy Word 1

GrpA DN IdlValue

Net Out COS Mask

DNet Status

Prod Assy Word 3

GrpB Pr FltState

Prod Assy Word 4

GrpB Pr FltValue

Prod Assy Word 5

GrpB DN FltState

Prod Assy Word 6

GrpB DN FltValue

Prod Assy Word 7

GrpB DN IdlState

Consumed IO Size

GrpB DN IdlValue

Produced IO Size

GrpC Pr FltState

Status COS Mask 1

GrpC Pr FltValue

Status COS Mask 2

GrpC DN FltState

Trip COS Mask 1

GrpC DN FltValue

Trip COS Mask 2

GrpC DN IdlState

Warning COS Mask 1

GrpC DN IdlValue

Warning COS Mask 2


DNet Voltage

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

129

Chapter 9

130

825-PDN DeviceNet Communication Card

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter

10

Modbus RTU Communications

Overview

This chapter describes the communications features supported by the 825-P


Modbus RTU option card.
Complete specifications for the Modbus protocol are available from the Modicon
web site at www.modicon.com.
Enable Modbus protocol using the serial port settings. When Modbus protocol is
enabled, the relay switches the port to Modbus protocol and deactivates the
ASCII protocol.
Modbus RTU is a binary protocol that permits communication between a single
master device and multiple slave devices. The communication is half duplex; only
one device transmits at a time. The master transmits a binary command that
includes the address of the desired slave device. All of the slave devices receive the
message, but only the slave device with the matching address responds.
The 825-P Modbus communication allows a Modbus master device to do the
following:
Acquire metering, monitoring, and event data from the relay.
Control 825-P output contacts and remote bits.
Read the 825-P self-test status and learn the present condition of
all the relay protection elements.

Installation

Mounting
The optional 825-PMB Modbus Communication Card occupies the
communication expansion slot [C] in the 825-P Modular Protection
System.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

131

Chapter 10

Modbus RTU Communications

Wiring

Table 61 - RS 485 Connections (top to bottom)


Pin

132

Pin Function

Definition

Dx+

Transmit Data (Positive)

Dx-

Transmit Data (Negative)

Rx+

Receive Data (Positive)

Rx-

Receive Data (Negative)

SH

Shield

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Modbus RTU Communications

Chapter 10

RS 232 Connections
5

4
9

3
8

2
7

1
6

Table 62 - RS 232 Connections


Pin

Pin Function

Definition

+5V DC

RxD

Receive Data

TxD

Transmit Data

NC

No Connection

GND

Signal Ground

GND

Signal Ground

NC

No Connection

RTS

Request to Send

CTS

Clear to Send

Figure 46 - Example of wiring between a MicroLogix PLC Advanced Interface Converter (AIC) and
the 825-PMB, Modbus Option Card.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

133

Chapter 10

Modbus RTU Communications

Figure 47 - Example of Modbus network consisting of a MicroLogix 1500 PLC as the Master device
and an 825-P and PanelView 550 as the Slave devices.

Commissioning

The Modbus communication card (Port 4) can be configured through


the front panel or serial port using the following settings. Front panel
access uses the following path: MAIN > Set/Show > Port > Port 4
Table 63 - Modbus communication card settings
Setting Prompt

Setting Range

Factory Default

COMM INTERFACE

232, 485

232

PROTOCOL

ASC, MOD

MOD

SPEED

300 38,400 bps

19,200

PARITY

O, E, N

MODBUS SLAVE ID

1 248

248

The following table provides settings to use for each communication card:
Table 64 - Communication card settings

134

Setting Prompt

Setting Range

DeviceNet

Modbus

Empty

COMM INTERFACE

232, 485

232

232

232

PROTOCOL

ASC, MOD

MOD

MOD

MOD

SPEED

300 38,400 bps

19,200

19,200

19,200

PARITY

O, E, N

MODBUS SLAVE ID

1 248

248

1 to 247

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Modbus RTU Communications

Modbus Queries

Chapter 10

Modbus RTU master devices initiate all exchanges by sending a query.


The query consists of the fields shown in Table 65.
Table 65 - Modbus Query Fields
Field

Number of Bytes

Slave Device Address

1 byte

Function Code

1 byte

Data Region

0250 bytes

Cyclical Redundancy Check (CRC)

2 bytes

The 825-P SLAVEID setting defines the device address. Set this value to
a unique number for each device on the Modbus network. For Modbus
communication to operate properly, no two slave devices may have the
same address.
The cyclical redundancy check detects errors in the received data. If an error is
detected, the relay discards the packet.

Modbus Responses

The slave device sends a response message after it performs the action
requested in the query. If the slave cannot execute the command for any
reason, it sends an error response. Otherwise, the slave device response
is formatted similarly to the query including the slave address, function
code, data (if applicable), and a cyclical redundancy check value.

Supported Modbus
Function Codes

The 825-P supports the Modbus function codes shown in Table 66.
Table 66 - 825-P Modbus Function Codes
Codes

Description

03h

Read Holding Registers

06h

Preset Single Register

10h

Preset Multiple Registers

60h

Read Parameter Information

61h

Read Parameter Text

62h

Read Enumeration Text

7Dh

Encapsulate Modbus Packet With Control

77Eh

NOP

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

135

Chapter 10

Modbus RTU Communications

Modbus Exception Responses

The 825-P sends an exception code under the conditions described in


Table 67.
Table 67 - 825-P Modbus Exception Codes
Exception
Code

Error Type

Description

Illegal Function Code

The received function code is either undefined or unsupported.

Illegal Data Address

The received command contains an unsupported address in the data field.

Illegal Data Value

Device Error

Busy

Memory Error

The received command contains a value that is out of range.


The 825-P is in the wrong state for the requested function.
This also stands for Service Failure for DeviceNet interface
applications. The relay is unable to perform the requested action
(i.e., cannot write to a read-only register).
The 825-P is unable to process the
command at this time a resource is busy.
Checksum error on stored data.

In the event that any of the errors listed in Table 67 occur, the relay assembles a
response message that includes the exception code in the data field. The relay sets
the most significant bit in the function code field to indicate to the master that
the data field contains an error code, instead of the requested data.

Cyclical Redundancy Check

The 825-P calculates a 2-byte CRC value using the device address, function code,
and data region. It appends this value to the end of every Modbus response.
When the master device receives the response, it recalculates the CRC. If the
calculated CRC matches the CRC sent by the 825-P, the master device uses the
data received. If there is not a match, the check fails and the message is ignored.
The devices use a similar process when the master sends queries.

03h Read Holding Register


Command

Use function code 03h to read directly from the Modbus Register Map shown
in Appendix B.
You may read a maximum of 125 registers at once with this function code. Most
masters use 4X references with this function code. If you are accustomed to 4X
references with this function code, for five-digit addressing, add 40001 to the
standard database address.

136

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Modbus RTU Communications

Chapter 10

Table 68 - 03h Read Holding Register Command (Sheet 1 of 2)


Bytes

Field

Requests from the master must have the following format:


1 byte

Slave Address

1 byte

Function Code (03h)

2 bytes

Starting Register Address

2 bytes

Number of Registers to Read

2 bytes

CRC-16

A successful response from the slave will have the following format:
1 byte

Slave Address

1 byte

Function Code (03h)

1 byte

Bytes of data (n)

n bytes

Data (2250)

2 bytes

CRC-16

The relay responses to errors in the query are shown in Table 69.
Table 69 - Responses to 03h Read Holding Register Query Errors
Error

Error Code Returned

Communication
Counter
Increments

Illegal register to read

Illegal Data Address (02h)

Invalid Address

Illegal number of registers to read

Illegal Data Value (03h)

Illegal Register

Format error

Illegal Data Value (03h)

Bad Packet Format

TIP

06h Preset Single


Register Command

The first holding register (parameter) for the 825-P ia 1. Some Modbus masters
use 0 as the first holding register. This can give the appearance of data being
offset by one register.

The 825-P uses this function to allow a Modbus master to write directly to a
database register. Refer to the Modbus Register Map in Appendix B for a list
of registers that can be written using this function code. If you are accustomed
to 4X references with this function code, for six-digit addressing, add 400001
to the standard database addresses.
In Table 70, the command response is identical to the command request.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

137

Chapter 10

Modbus RTU Communications

Table 70 - 06h Preset Single Register Command


Bytes

Field

Requests from the master must have the following format:


1 byte

Slave Address

1 byte

Function Code (06h)

2 bytes

Register Address

2 bytes

Data

2 bytes

CRC-16

The relay responses to errors in the query are shown in Table 71.
Table 71 - Responses to 06h Preset Single Register Query Errors

10h Preset Multiple


Registers Command

Error

Error Code Returned

Communication Counter
Increments

Illegal register address

Illegal Data Address (02h)

Invalid Address
Illegal Write

Illegal register value

Illegal Data Value (03h)

Illegal Write

Format error

Illegal Data Value (03h)

Bad Packet Format

This function code works much like code 06h, except that it allows you to write
multiple registers at once, up to 100 per operation. If you are accustomed to 4X
references with the function code, for six-digit addressing, simply add 400001 to
the standard database addresses.
Table 72 - 10h Preset Multiple Registers Command
Bytes

Field

Requests from the master must have the following format:


1 byte

Slave Address

1 byte

Function Code (10h)

2 bytes

Starting Address

2 bytes

Number of Registers to Write

1 byte

Bytes of Data (n)

n bytes

Data

2 bytes

CRC-16

A successful response from the slave will have the following format:

138

1 byte

Slave Address

1 byte

Function Code (10h)

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Modbus RTU Communications

Bytes

Field

2 bytes

Starting Address

2 bytes

Number of Registers

2 bytes

CRC-16

Chapter 10

The relay responses to errors in the query are shown below:


Table 73 - 10h Preset Multiple Registers Query Error Messages

60h Read Parameter


Information Command

Error

Error Code Returned

Communication Counter
Increments

Illegal register to set

Illegal Data Address (02h)

Invalid Address
Illegal Write

Illegal number of registers to set

Illegal Data Value (03h)

Illegal Write

Incorrect number of bytes in


query data region

Illegal Data Value (03h)

Bad Packet Format


Illegal Write

Invalid register data value

Illegal Data Value (03h)

Illegal Write

The 825-P uses this function to allow a Modbus master to read parameter
information from the relay. One parameter (setting) is read in each query.
Table 74 - 60h Read Parameter Information Command
Bytes

Field

Requests from the master must have the following format:


1 byte

Slave Address

1 byte

Function Code (60h)

2 bytes

Parameter Number

2 bytes

CRC-16

A successful response from the slave will have the following format:
1 byte

Slave Address

1 byte

Function Code (60h)

2 bytes

Parameter Number

1 byte

Parameter Descriptor

1 byte

Parameter Conversion

2 bytes

Parameter Minimum Settable Value

2 bytes

Parameter Maximum Settable Value

2 bytes

Parameter Default Value

2 bytes

CRC-16

The Parameter Descriptor field is defined in Table 75:

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

139

Chapter 10

Modbus RTU Communications

Table 75 - 60h Read Parameter Descriptor Field Definition


Bit

Name

Description

RO: Read-only

1 when the setting is read-only

H: Hidden

1 when the setting is hidden

DBL: 32-bit

1 when the following setting is a fractional value of this setting

RA: RAM-only

1 when the setting is not saved in nonvolatile memory

RR: Read-only if running

1 when the setting is read-only if in running/operational state

P: Power Cycle or Reset

1 when the setting change requires a power cycle or reset

Reserved

Extend

Reserved to extend the descriptor table

The Parameter Conversion field is defined in Table 76:


Table 76 - 60h Read Parameter Conversion Field Definition
Conversion
Value

Type

Multiplier

Divisor

Offset

Base

Boolean

Unsigned Integer

Unsigned Integer

10

Unsigned Integer

100

Unsigned Integer

1000

Hexidecimal

Integer

Integer

10

Integer

100

Integer

1000

10

Enumeration

11

Bit Enumeration

Calculate the actual (not scaled) value of the parameter (setting) using Equation 2:

value =

(Parameter Value + Offset) Multiplier Base


Divisor
Equation 1

Calculate the scaled setting value using Equation 2:

value =

140

value Divisor
Offset
Multiplier Base

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Equation 2

Modbus RTU Communications

Chapter 10

The relay response to errors in the query are shownTable 77:


Table 77 - Responses to 60h Read Parameter Information Query Errors

61h Read Parameter


Text Command

Error

Error Code Returned

Communication
Counter Increments

Illegal parameter to read

Illegal Data Value (03h)

Illegal Register

The 825-P uses this function to allow a Modbus master to read parameter text
from the relay. One parameter text (setting name) is read in each query.
Table 78 - 61h Read Parameter Text Command
Bytes

Field

Requests from the master must have the following format:


1 byte

Slave Address

1 byte

Function Code (61h)

2 bytes

Parameter Number

2 bytes

CRC-16

A successful response from the slave will have the following format:
1 byte

Slave Address

1 byte

Function Code (61h)

2 bytes

Parameter Number

16 bytes

Parameter Text (setting name)

4 bytes

Parameter Unites (e.g., Amps)

2 bytes

CRC-16

The relay responses to errors in the query are shown below:


Table 79 - 61h Read Parameter Text Query Error Messages
Error

Error Code Returned

Communication
Counter Increments

Illegal parameter to read

Illegal Data Value (03h)

Illegal Register
Illegal Write

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

141

Chapter 10

Modbus RTU Communications

62h Read Enumeration


Text Command

The 825-P uses this function to allow a Modbus master to read parameter
enumeration or bit enumeration values (setting lists) from the relay. One
parameter enumeration is read in each query.
Table 80 - 62h Read Enumeration Text Command
Bytes

Field

Requests from the master must have the following format:


1 byte

Slave Address

1 byte

Function Code (62h)

2 bytes

Parameter Number

1 byte

Enumeration Index

2 bytes

CRC-16

A successful response from the slave will have the following format:
1 byte

Slave Address

1 byte

Function Code (62h)

2 bytes

Parameter Number

1 byte

Enumeration Index

16 bytes

Enumeration Text

2 bytes

CRC-16

The relay responses to errors in the query are shown below:


Table 81 - 61h Read Parameter Enumeration Text Query Error Messages

142

Error

Error Code Returned

Communication
Counter Increments

Illegal parameter to read

Illegal Data Value (03h)

Illegal Register

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Modbus RTU Communications

7Dh Encapsulated Packet


With Control Command

Chapter 10

The 825-P uses this function to allow a Modbus master to perform control
operations and another Modbus function with one query. This command will be
transmitted periodically to achieve high-speed I/O processing and also serve as a
heartbeat between the communication option card and the main board.

Bytes

Field

Requests from the master must have the following format:


1 byte

Slave Address

1 byte

Function Code (7Dh)

2 bytes

Subfunction (2000h)

1 byte

Modbus Function

n bytes

Optional Data to Support Modbus Function (0250)

2 bytes

CRC-16

A successful response from the slave will have the following format:
1 byte

Slave Address

1 byte

Function Code (7Dh)

2 bytes

Subfunction (2100h or 2101h)

1 byte

Function Code (7Eh)

n bytes

Optional Data to Support Modbus Function (0250)

2 bytes

CRC-16

The format of the relay responses to errors in the query is shown in Table 82.
Table 82 - 7Dh Encapsulated Packet Query Errors
Bytes

Field

Requests from the master must have the following format:


1 byte

Slave Address

1 byte

Function Code (7Dh)

2 bytes

Subfunction (2100h or 2101h)

1 byte

Function Code (7Eh)

1 byte

Function Error Code

2 bytes

CRC-16

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

143

Chapter 10

Modbus RTU Communications

This function code the allows a Modbus master to perform a control operation
and is used inside of the 7Dh when no regular Modbus query is required.

7Eh NOP Command

Table 83 - 17Eh NOP Command


Bytes

Field

Requests from the master must have the following format:


1 byte

Slave Address

1 byte

Function Code (7Eh)

2 bytes

CRC-16

A successful response from the slave will have the following format:
1 byte

Slave Address

1 byte

Function Code (7Eh)

2 bytes

CRC-16

An example of a 7D message using 7E will have the following format:

Modbus Password Control


and Parameter Modification

1 byte

Slave Address

1 byte

Function Code (7Dh)

2 bytes

Subfunction (2100h)

2 bytes

Subfunction (2101h)

1 byte

Function Code (7Eh)

2 bytes

CRC-16

The 825-P parameters MID, TID, Password, and the User Map Registers are
settable via Modbus. Any settable parameter or reset that requires a valid
password write will timeout 15 minutes after the last valid write to any of these
restricted registers.
Writing the password for access level change requires the 10h (preset multiple
register) command. Changing the password can be done one register at a time. A
device error is returned during settings save if the relay is disabled or settings are
being changed on another port. Device error is also returned for attempts to write
to settable values if the access level has not been changed.
To enable modification of the settable parameters, a valid Access Level E (EAC)
password must be written to the password registers using function code 10h.
Note changing the password will change the password for all ports.
Once a valid password has been written, then the values may be changed using
standard single or multiple register writes (06h or 10h). Until a command is
issued to save or discard the settings, the value returned when reading the settable
parameter registers is a temporary copy.
To save the modified parameters, write a 0x0001 to the Save Settings register of
the Control I/O region. This is the only method that saves the changes.

144

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Modbus RTU Communications

Chapter 10

To discard settings, either write a 0x0001 to the Discard Settings register of the
Control I/O region, write a 0x0001 to the Drop Access Level register of the
Control I/O region or wait fifteen minutes since last write for access level
timeout.

Modbus Serialized Events


Recording Register
Operation

To obtain Serialized Events Recording (SER) records using the Modbus


register map perform the following steps.
1. Write the date and time for the first desired record to the Start
Record Time/Date registers of the SER region of the map.
2. Read the Number of Records Available register to determine how
many SER records are available on or after the selected date and time.
Ten records are available for reading from the SER region of the map.
3. Write to the Selected Starting Record register to select additional records
from the number available.
For example, if the Number of Records available is 25, write 11 to
the Selected Starting Record to read records 1120.

Modbus Load Profile


Register Operation

To read load profile data from the 825-P using the Modbus map, perform the
following steps.
1. Read the Load Profile 1 Name to Load Profile 12 Name registers from the
Product Information region of the map.
These names are returned as a NULL terminated ASCII string and
provide the human readable label for the profiled data. If the load profile
channel is unused, then the associated label is an empty string.
2. Write the date and time for the first desired record to the Start Record
Time/Date registers of the Load Profile region of the map.
Up to 100 records are available on or after the selected date and time.
Channels that are not profiling data returns a reserved value when read
(see Table 84).
Table 84 - Modbus Conversion
Conversion

Description

Reserved Value

INT

Value ranges = 3276732767

0x8000

INT10

INT with scale factor of 10


(divide by 10 to obtain value)

0x8000

INT100

INT with scale factor of 100


(divide by 100 to obtain value)

0x8000

INT1000

INT with scale factor of 1000


(divide by 1000 to obtain value)

0x8000

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

145

Chapter 10

146

Modbus RTU Communications

Conversion

Description

Reserved Value

UINT

Value ranges from 0 to 65535

0x8000

UINT10

UINT with scale factor of 10


(divide by 10 to obtain value)

0x8000

UINT100

UINT with scale factor of 100


(divide by 100 to obtain value)

0x8000

UINT1000

UINT with scale factor of 1000


(divide by 1000 to obtain value)

0x8000

LONG

Value ranges = 21474836472147483647, most


significant word in lower address register

0x80000000

LONG10

LONG with scale factor of 10


(divide by 10 to obtain value)

0x80000000

LONG100

LONG with scale factor of 100


(divide by 100 to obtain value)

0x80000000

LONG1000

LONG with scale factor of 1000


(divide by 1000 to obtain value)

0x80000000

BITMAP

A bitmapped value

ENUM

An enumerated value

STRING

A null terminated ASCII string

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter

11

Testing & Troubleshooting

Overview

Relay testing is typically divided into two categories. Relay tests are performed:
when the relay is installed or commissioned and
periodically once the relay is in service
This chapter provides information on both types of testing for the 825-P relay.
Because the 825-P is equipped with extensive self-tests, traditional periodic test
procedures can be eliminated or reduced.
If a problem occurs during either commissioning or periodic tests, this chapter
provides a guide to isolating and correcting the problem.

Testing

Commissioning Tests
Introduction
Each 825-P is fully calibrated and functionally tested prior to shipment. This
helps to ensure that you receive a relay that operates correctly and accurately.
Commissioning tests must verify that the relay is properly connected to the
motor and all auxiliary equipment. Verify control signal inputs and outputs.
Use an AC connection check to verify that the relay current and voltage inputs
are of the proper magnitude and phase rotation.
Brief functional tests ensure that the relay settings are correct. It is not necessary
to test every element, timer, and function in these tests.
The following procedure is a guideline to help you enter settings into the 825-P
and to verify that it is properly connected. Modify the procedure as necessary to
conform to your standard practices. Use this procedure at initial relay installation;
you do not need to repeat it unless major changes are made to the relay electrical
connections.

Required Equipment
Before proceeding with commissioning tests, ensure the following equipment is
present and properly installed as stated.
825-P Relay installed and connected according to your protection
design

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

147

Chapter 11

Testing & Troubleshooting

PC with Serial Port, MPS Explorer software, and serial communication


cable
Terminal Emulation Software
Serial Communication Cable
AC and DC Elementary Schematics
Wiring Diagrams (for this relay installation)
Continuity Tester
Protective Relay AC Test Source
Minimum: single-phase voltage and current with phase angle control
Preferred: three-phase voltage and current with phase angle control

Procedure
1. Remove the control voltage and AC signals from the 825-P by opening the
appropriate breakers or removing fuses.
2. Isolate the relay trip contact.
3. Verify the correct AC and DC connections by performing point-to-point
continuity checks on the associated circuits.
4. Apply AC or DC control voltage to the relay.
5. After the relay is energized, the front panel green ENABLE LED
illuminates.
6. Connect a PC to the relay using an appropriate serial cable.
7. Start the MPS Explorer software and establish communication with the
relay.
8. Set the correct relay time and date using either the front panel or MPS
Explorer software.
9. Enter the relay settings for your application.
10. If you are connecting an external RTD scanner, follow the substeps below;
otherwise continue with Step 11.
a. Connect the fiber optic cable to the module fiber optic output.
b. Plug the relay end of the fiber optic cable into the relay fiber optic input.
11. Verify the relay AC connections.

148

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Testing & Troubleshooting

Chapter 11

12. Connect the AC test source current or voltage transformers to the relay
side of the open breaker or contactor.
NOTE:

If voltage transformers are used: Apply the AC voltage signal to the relay side of an open
disconnect block, which is located between the secondary side of the voltage transformer and
the relay.
If the relay is set to accept phase-to-ground voltages (DELTA_Y = Wye): Set current
and/or voltage phase angles as shown in Figure 48.
If the relay is set to accept delta voltages (DELTA_Y = Delta): Set the current and/or
voltage phase angles as shown in Figure 49.

13. Apply the rated current.


NOTE:

If current transformers are used: Apply the AC current signal to the converters module
side of an open CT-shorting disconnect block, which is located between the secondary side of
the current transformer and the MCM converter module.

14. If the relay is equipped with voltage inputs, apply rated voltage for your
application.
15. Use the front panel METER VALUES > INSTANTANEOUS METER function or serial
port METER command to verify that the relay is measuring the magnitude
and phase angle of both voltage and current correctly. Take into account
the relay PTR and CTR1 settings and the fact that the quantities are
displayed in primary units.
16. If you are using a core balance current transformer, apply a
single-phase current (A-Phase) as described in Step 11. Do not apply
voltage.
17. Verify that the relay is measuring the magnitude and phase angle of the GF
Current-Core Balance correctly.
The expected magnitude is (Applied Phase Current) (CTRN). The
expected phase angle is zero.
Figure 48 - Three-Phase Wye AC Connections
VC

VB

+120

+120
VA

120
PHROT = ABC

VA
120
PHROT = ACB

VB
VC
When setting Phase Rotation = ABC, set angle Va = angle Ia = 0
set angle Vb = angle Ib = 120
set angle Vc = angle Ic = 120
When setting Phase Rotation = ACB, set angle Va = angle Ia = 0
set angle Vb = angle Ib = 120
set angle Vc = angle Ic = 120

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

149

Chapter 11

Testing & Troubleshooting

Figure 49 - Three-Phase Open-Delta AC Connections

VAB
60
VCB

VCB
60

VAB
PHROT = ABC

When setting set angle Ia = 0


Phase Rotation = ABC, set angle Ib = 120
set angle Ic = 120
set angle Vab = +30
set angle Vcb = +90

PHROT = ACB
When setting set angle Ia = 0
Phase Rotation = ACB, set angle Ib = 120
set angle Ic = 120
set angle Vab = 30
set angle Vcb = 90

18. Verify the control input connections are properly seated. Check the
control input status in the relay using the front panel MAIN > TARGETS > ROW
9 function. As the appropriate voltage is applied across input common and
input, its corresponding position in Row 9 changes from zero to one.
19. Verify the output contact operation by performing the following steps:
a. Disconnect the MCM converter module cable from the connector on
the rear panel of the 825-P. The 825-P trip relay and AUX1 (alarm)
relay will be energized once the front panel displays the following
output:
STATUS FAIL
MCM/CWE Failure

b. Set AUX2C to equal: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1.


This will cause the AUX2 contact to close.
c. Repeat this process for AUX3AUX6, if present.
Ensure that each contact closure produces the result required in its
associated annunciation, control, or trip circuit.
d. Reconnect the MCM converter module cable to the 825-P.
e. Select STATUS from the front panel display menu and press the Enter
push button. The front panel displays the following:
Confirm Hardware
Config (Enter)

f. Press

. The front panel displays the following:

Accept Config?
Yes No

g. Select Yes, then press the Enter push button. The front panel displays
the following:
Config Accepted
Enter to Restart

h. Press
. The 825-P will restart and the ENABLE LED will
illuminate to indicate that the MCM module is recognized.

150

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Testing & Troubleshooting

Chapter 11

20. Perform any protection element tests using the individual element test
procedures in Selected Functional Tests on page151.
Perform the tests until it is proven that the relay operates as intended.
Exhaustive element performance testing is not necessary for
commissioning.
21. Connect the relay for tripping duty.
22. Verify that any settings changed during the tests performed in Step 19 and
Step 20 are changed back to the correct values for your application.
23. Prepare the relay for operation by clearing the relay data buffers using
MPS Explorer software.
Clearing the relay buffers prevents data generated during commissioning
testing from being confused with operational data collected later.
24. Start the motor only when it is safe to do so.
25. Verify the following AC quantities using the front panel METER or serial
port METER command:
phase current magnitudes are nearly equal and
phase current angles are balanced, have proper phase rotation, and have
the appropriate phase relationship to the phase voltages.
26. If your relay is equipped with voltage inputs, verify the following:
phase voltage magnitudes are nearly equal.
Phase voltage phase angles are balanced and have proper phase rotation.
The 825-P relay in now ready for continuous service.

Selected Functional Tests


Phase Current Measuring Accuracy
1. Connect the current source to the MCM converter module, as shown in
Figure 50.
Figure 50 - Current Source Connections
IC
IB
Current
Test
Source

IA
1

MCM
2

Cable with
Plugs
825-P

IN

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

151

Chapter 11

Testing & Troubleshooting

2. Using the front panel or MPS Explorer software, record the Phase CT
Ratio and Phase Rotation setting values.
3. Set the phase current angles to apply balanced three-phase currents in
accordance with the Phase Rotation setting. Refer to Figure48 on
page149.
4. Set each phase current magnitude equal to the values listed in Column 1
of Table 85. Use the front panel to view the phase current values. The relay
displays the applied current magnitude times the CT Ratio setting.
Table 85 - Phase Current Measuring Accuracy
|I|
Applied
(A secondary)
Minimum
Mid-range
Maximum

Expected
Reading
CTR1 x |I|

APhase
Reading
(A primary)

BPhase
Reading
(A primary)

CPhase
Reading
(A primary)

For the minimum, mid-range, and maximum values, refer to the Ie setting range
for a given MCM converter module. These converter module current ranges are:
825-MCM2 (0.52.5 A)
825-MCM5 (1.05.0 A)
825-MCM20 (2.520 A)
825-MCM180 (20180 A)
825-MCM420 (160420 A)
825-MCM630N (160630 A)

Current Unbalance Element Accuracy


1. Connect the current source to the MCM module as shown in Figure 48.
2. Using the front panel SET/SHOW function or MPS Explorer software,
record the Phase CT Ratio, Phase Rotation, and Motor FLA (Ie) setting
values.
3. Set the phase current angles to apply balanced three-phase currents in
accordance with the Phase Rotation setting. See Figure 48.
4. Apply the appropriate magnitude for each phase current as shown in
column 1 of Table 86
Table 86 - Current Unbalance Measuring Accuracy
|I| Applied (A secondary)
|IA| = 0.9 FLA
|IB| = FLA
|IC| = FLA
|IA| = 0.75 FLA
|IB| = FLA
|IC| = FLA

152

Expected Reading (%)


7%

17%

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Actual Reading (%)

Testing & Troubleshooting

Chapter 11

Table 86 - Current Unbalance Measuring Accuracy


|I| Applied (A secondary)
|IA| = FLA
|IB| = 1.2 FLA
|IC| = 1.2 FLA
|IA| = 0.9 FLA
|IB| = 1.1 FLA
|IC| = 1.1 FLA

Expected Reading (%)


12%

Actual Reading (%)

13%

Power and Power Factor Measuring Accuracy


The following tests assume use of an MCM2, MCM5, or MCM20 converter
module.

Wye-Connected Voltages
Perform the following steps to test wye-connected voltages:
1. Connect the current source to the MCM module, as shown in Figure 50.
2. Connect the voltage source to the 825-P, as shown in Figure 51. Make sure
that Xfmt Connection = Wye.
Figure 51 - Wye Voltage Source Connections
VA

VB
Voltage
Test
Source

L1

L2
825-P

VC

VN

L3

3. Using the front panel SET/SHOW or MPS Explorer software, record the
Phase CT Ratio, Phase VT Ratio, and Phase Rotation setting values.
4. Apply the current and voltage quantities shown in Column 1 of Table 87.
Values are given for Phase Rotation = ABC and Phase Rotation = ACB.
5. Use the front panel METER function or MPS Explorer software to verify
the results.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

153

Chapter 11

Testing & Troubleshooting

Table 87 - Power Quantity Accuracy Wye Voltages


Applied Currents and
Voltages
PHROT = ABC
Ia = 2.5 26
Ib = 2.5 146
Ic = 2.5 +94
Va = 67 0
Vb = 67 120
Vc = 67 +120
PHROT = ACB
Ia = 2.5 26
Ib = 2.5 +94
Ic = 2.5 146
Va = 67 0
Vb = 67 +120
Vc = 67 120

Real Power
(kW)
Expected:
P=
0.4523 CTR1 PTR

Reactive Power (kVAR)


Expected:
Q=
0.2211 CTR1 PTR

Power Factor
(pf)
Expected:
pf =
0.90 lag

Measured:

Measured:

Measured:

Expected:
P=
0.4523 CTR1 PTR

Expected:
Q=
0.2211 CTR1 PTR

Expected:
pf =
0.90 lag

Measured:

Measured:

Measured:

Delta-Connected Voltages
Perform the following steps to test delta-connected voltages:
1. Connect the current source to the MCM module, as shown in Figure50
on page151.
2. Connect the voltage source to the 825-P, as shown in Figure 52. Make sure
that Xfmr Connection=Delta.
Figure 52 - Delta Voltage Source Connections
VA

VB
Voltage
Test
Source

L1

L2
825-P

VC

VN

L3

3. Use the front panel SET/SHOW or MPS Explorer software to record the
Phase CT Ratio, Phase VT Ratio, and Phase Rotation setting values.
4. Apply the current and voltage quantities shown in Column 1 of Table 88.
Values are given for Phase Rotation = ABC and Phase Rotation = ACB.
5. Use the front panel METER or MPS Explorer software to verify the
results.

154

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Testing & Troubleshooting

Chapter 11

Table 88 - Power Quantity Accuracy Delta Voltages


Applied Currents and
Voltages
PHROT = ABC
Ia = 2.5 26
Ib = 2.5 146
Ic = 2.5 +94
Vab = 120 +30
Vbc = 120 90
PHROT = ACB
Ia = 2.5 26
Ib = 2.5 +94
Ic = 2.5 146
Vab = 120 30
Vbc = 120 +90

Real Power
(kW)
Expected:
P=
0.4677 CTR1 PTR

Reactive Power
(kVAR)
Expected:
Q=
0.2286 CTR1 PTR

Power Factor
(pf)
Expected
pf =
0.90 lag

Measured:

Measured:

Measured:

Expected:
P=
0.4677 CTR1 PTR

Expected:
Q=
0.2286 CTR1 PTR

Expected:
pf =
0.90 lag

Measured:

Measured:

Measured:

Periodic Tests (Routine Maintenance)


Due to the 825-P being equipped with extensive self-tests, the most effective
maintenance task is monitoring the front panel messages after a self-test failure.
In addition, review each relay event report generated by a fault. Such reviews
frequently reveal problems with equipment external to the relay, such as
instrument transformers and control wiring.
The 825-P does not require specific routine tests, but your operation standards
can require some degree of periodic relay verification. If you need or wish to
perform periodic relay verification, the following checks are recommended.

Relay Status Verification


Use the front panel STATUS or MPS Explorer software to verify that the relay
self-tests have not detected any WARN or FAIL conditions.

Meter Verification
Verify that the relay is correctly measuring current and voltage (if included) by
comparing the relay meter readings to separate external meters.

Control Input Verification


Using the front panel MAIN > TARGETS > ROW 9 function, check the
control input status in the relay. As the appropriate voltage is applied across input
and input common, its corresponding position in Row 9 changes from zero to
one.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

155

Chapter 11

Testing & Troubleshooting

Contact Output Verification


Disconnect the MCM converter module cable from the connector on the rear
panel of the 825-P. Use the front panel MAIN > TARGETS > ROW 3 function
to check that MCM/CWEFLT, Bit 0, is equal to one. Use MPS Explorer
software to make TRIPC = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 which closes the Trip contact.
Set AUX2C = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1. This will cause the AUX2 contact to close. Repeat
the process for AUX3AUX6, if present. Ensure that each contact closure
produces the result that is needed in its associated annunciation, control, or trip
circuit [remove control power to close the AUX1 (Alarm) contact].

Self-Tests
The 825-P runs a variety of self-tests. As shown in Table 89, when the relay
detects certain self-test failures, the Critical Alarm Status is latched. A latched
Critical Alarm Status closes the Trip contact and displays the associated message
on the front panel.
When the Critical Alarm Status column in Table 89 shows Not Latched, the trip
contact will not close because of the self-test failure. However, the associated
message (if present) is displayed on the front panel.
All relay self-test failure messages are automatically sent to the serial port.
Table 89 - Relay Self-Tests (Sheet 1 of 2)

Self-Test
External RAM
Internal RAM
CR_RAM
Code Flash
Mainboard EEPROM
Data Flash
Front Panel
Voltage Board
Current Board
I/O Board
DeviceNet Board
CPU Exception Vector
Loss of MCU Crystal
Current Board A/D Offset
Voltage Board A/D Offset
+3.3V Warn

Description
Performs a read/write test on system RAM
Performs a read/write test on CPU RAM
Performs a checksum test on the active copy of settings
Checksum is computed on code base
Checksum is computed on critical data
Checksum is computed on critical data
Check if ID register matches expected
Check if ID register matches part number
Check if ID register matches part number
Check if ID register matches part number
DeviceNet card does not respond in 500 ms.
CPU error
Clock stopped
Measure DC offset at each input channel
Measure DC offset at each input channel
Measure +3.3V power supply

+3.3V Fail

Measure +3.3V power supply

+5V Warn

Measure +5V power supply

156

Limits

Checksum
Checksum
Checksum
Checksum

50 mV
50 mV
<3.43V
>3.13V
<3.07V
>3.53V
<5.2V
>4.8V

Protection
Disabled on
Failure
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No

Critical
Alarm Status
Latched
Latched
Latched
Latched
Latched
Latched
Not Latched
Latched
Latched
Latched
Latched
Latched
Latched
Not Latched
Not Latched
Not Latched

Yes

Latched

No

Not Latched

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Front Panel Message


on Failure
External RAM FAILED
Coldfire RAM FAILED
CR_RAM FAILED
PROGRAM MEMORY FAILED
EEPROM FAILED
FLASH FAILED
VT CALIBRATION FAILED
CT CALIBRATION FAILED
I/O BOARD FAILURE
DEVICENET BOARD FAILURE
Vector nn
CLOCK STOPPED

+3.3V FAIL

Testing & Troubleshooting

Chapter 11

Table 89 - Relay Self-Tests (Sheet 2 of 2)

Self-Test
+5V Fail

Description
Measure +5V power supply

+2.5V Warn

Measure +2.5V power supply

+2.5V Fail

Measure +2.5V power supply

+3.75V Warn

Measure +3.75 power supply

+3.75V Fail

Measure +3.75 power supply

-1.25V Warn

Measure 1.25V power supply

-1.25V Fail

Measure 1.25V power supply

-5V Warn

Measure 5V power supply

-5V Fail

Measure 5V power supply

CT Board A/D Fail


PT Board A/D Fail
Clock Battery Warn
RTC Chip

Check received data


Check received data
Check battery voltage level
Unable to communicate with clock or fails timekeeping test
Measure internal relay temperature

Temperature Warn
Temperature Fail
Mainboard FPGA
MCM/CWE Type
Back-plane Comms
Diagnostics

Measure internal relay temperature


Fail if mainboard Field Programmable Gate Array does
not accept program
Fail if the detected external converter module does not
match the part number
Fail if GPSB is busy two processing intervals in a row

Troubleshooting

Limits
<5.4V
>4.65V
<2.60V
>2.42V
<2.68V
>2.32V
<3.90V
>3.60V
<4.02V
>3.48V
>1.27V
<1.20V
>1.33V
<1.16V
>5.2V
<4.8V
>5.4V
<4.65V

< 2.7V

>40 C
<+85 C
>+100 C

Protection
Disabled on
Failure
Yes

Front Panel Message


Critical
Alarm Status on Failure
Latched
+5V FAIL

No

Not Latched

Yes

Latched

No

Not Latched

Yes

Latched

No

Not Latched

Yes

Latched

No

Not Latched

Yes

Latched

5V FAIL

Yes
Yes
No
No

Latched
Latched
Not Latched
Not Latched

CT BOARD ADC FAILURE


PT BOARD ADC FAILURE
CLOCK BATTERY WARN
RTC WARN

No

Not Latched

TEMPERATURE WARN

Yes
Yes

Latched
Latched

TEMPERATURE FAIL
FPGA FAIL

No
Yes

+2.5V FAIL

+3.75V FAIL

1.25V FAIL

MCM/CWE FAIL
Latched

GPSB FAIL

Refer to Table 90 for troubleshooting instructions in particular situations.

Table 90 - Troubleshooting
Problem
The relay enable front panel LED is not illuminated.

Possible Cause
Input power is not present or a fuse is blown.
Self-test failure.

The relay front panel display does not show characters.


The relay does not accurately measure voltages or
currents.

The relay front panel has timed out.


The relay is de-energized.
Wiring error.
Incorrect Phase CT Ratio, Core B. CT Ratio, or Phase VT
Ratio setting.
Voltage neutral terminal (N) is not properly grounded.

Solution
Verify that input power is present.
Check fuses continuity.
View the self-test failure message on the front panel
display.
Press the Esc push button to activate the display.
Verify input power and fuse continuity.
Verify input wiring.
Verify instrument transformer ratios, connections, and
associated settings.
Verify wiring and connections.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

157

Chapter 11

Testing & Troubleshooting

Table 90 - Troubleshooting
Problem
The relay does not respond to commands from a device
connected to the serial port.

The relay does not respond to faults.

The relay trips on overload sooner than expected.

Possible Cause
Cable is not connected.
Cable is not the correct type.
The relay or device is at an incorrect baud rate or has
another parameter mismatch.
The relay serial port has received an XOFF, halting
communications.
The relay is improperly set.
Improper test source settings.
Current or voltage input wiring error.
Failed relay self-test.
The phase rotation is improperly set.
The FLA is improperly set.
The SF is improperly set.

Solution
Verify the cable connections.
Verify the cable pinout.
Verify Device software setup.
Type <Ctrl> Q to send the relay XON and restart
communications.
Verify the relay settings.
Verify the test source settings.
Verify input wiring.
Use the front panel RELAY STATUS function to view selftest results.
Verify phase rotation setting as described in Figure 48 or
Figure 49.
Verify FLA settings.
Verify the Service Factor of the motor.

Field Serviceability
ATTENTION: Disconnect or de-energize all external connections before opening this
device. Contact with hazardous voltages and currents inside this device can cause
electrical shock that can lead to injury or death.
Equipment components are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Undetectable
permanent damage can result if you do not use proper ESD procedures. Ground yourself,
your work surface, and this equipment, before removing any cover from this equipment.
If your facility is not equipped to work with these components, contact Rockwell
Automation about returning this device and related Rockwell Automation equipment
for service.

The 825-P firmware can be upgraded in the field (refer to Chapter 13for
firmware upgrade instructions). By monitoring the front-panel messages, the user
will be aware of a self-test failure occurrence. By using the metering functions, the
user will be aware if the analog front-end (not monitored by relay self-test) is
functional.
The only two components that can be replaced in the field are (1) the power
supply fuse and (2) the real-time clock (RTC) battery.

Power Supply Fuse Replacement


To replace the power supply fuse, perform the following steps:
1. De-energize the relay.
2. Remove the eight rear panel screws, ground screw, and relay rear panel.
3. Remove the Slot A printed circuit board.
4. Locate the fuse on the board, then remove the fuse from the fuse holder.
158

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Testing & Troubleshooting

Chapter 11

5. Replace the fuse with a BUSS 2A/250V ABC (ceramic) or equivalent.


6. Insert the printed circuit board into Slot A.
7. Reinstall the relay rear panel, ground screw, and eight rear panel screws.
8. Energize the relay.

Real-Time Clock (RTC) Battery Replacement


The RTC battery, which is a 3V lithium coin cell battery (Rayovac BR2335 or
equivalent), performs the following functions:
Powers the clock (date and time) if the external power source is lost or
removed.
Retains the thermal memory for the thermal overload function when the
power source is lost or removed.
Operates nominally at room temperature (25C) for ten years at rated
load.
Experiences a low self-discharge rate when the relay is powered from an
external source. Thus, battery life can extend well beyond ten years. The
battery cannot be recharged.
To replace the real-time clock battery, perform the following steps:
1. De-energize the relay.
2. Remove the eight rear panel screws, ground screw, and relay rear panel.
3. Remove the Slot B printed circuit board.
4. Locate the battery clip (holder) on the circuit board.
5. Remove the existing battery from beneath the battery clip.
6. Properly dispose of the battery.
7. Install the new battery, 3V lithium coin cell battery (Rayovac BR2335 or
equivalent), with the positive (+) side facing up.
8. Insert the printed circuit board into Slot B.
9. Reinstall the relay rear panel, ground screw, and eight rear panel screws.
10. Energize the relay.
11. Set the relay date and time.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

159

Chapter 11

Testing & Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting DeviceNet

Table 91 - DeviceNet Troubleshooting Procedures

Table 92 Network Status LED


Off

Definition
The device has not completed the initialization, is not on an
active network, or may not be powered up.
Flashing Green Red Off Power-up LED test.
Solid Green
The device is operating in a normal condition, and is
communicating to another device on the network.
Flashing Green
The device is operating in a normal condition, is online, but with
no connection to another device. This is the typical state for new
devices.
Flashing Red
Recoverable fault has occurred.
Solid Red

The device has detected a major error that has rendered it


incapable of communicating on the network (Duplicate MAC ID,
Bus off, media issue).

Flashing Red and Green

The device is in a communication faulted state.

Flashing Red and Green

The device has detected a network access error and is in a


communication faulted state. The device has subsequently
received and accepted an Identify Communication Faulted
Request Protocol message.

Troubleshooting Device
Backplane Communication

Possible Cause
Check to ensure that the product is wired correctly and configured on the network.
No action required.
No action required.
The device could need to be mapped to a master scanner, placed in a scanlist, or have
another device communicate to it.
Ensure that the PLC and scanner are operating correctly and that there are no media
or cabling issues. Check to see if other networked devices are in a similar state.
Troubleshooting should be done to ensure that the network is correct (terminators,
lengths, etc.) and there is not a duplicate node problem. If other devices on the
network appear to be operating fine and power cycling the device does not work,
contact Technical Support.
Power cycling the device could resolve the problem; however, if the problem
continues, it could be necessary to contact Technical Support.
This is not a common state for DeviceNet products. Power cycling the device could
resolve the problem, however if the problem continues it could be necessary to find
out what is causing the problem.

Table 93 - Device Backplane Communication Troubleshooting Procedures

Table 94 Bus Status LED


Off
Green
Red

160

Definition
The device is in Power-up mode.
The device is operating in a normal condition.
The 825-PDN card has lost backplane communications
with the 825-P relay.

Possible Cause
Check to ensure that the product is wired correctly. Confirm that the product has
appropriate DeviceNet and control power. Verify that the 825-PDN card is inserted
correctly.
No action required.
Confirm product has appropriate DeviceNet and control power.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter

12

ASCII Serial Communications

Overview

The 825-P Relay has the following ASCII serial communications interfaces:
PORT 4 Slot C for optional Modbus network communications.
PORT F Front-panel EIA-232 serial port.
This chapter describes the connections and commands used with ASCII serial
communications.

ASCII Serial Port


Operation

Introduction
The serial port interface provides an efficient way to communicate with the relay
using a PC to review and enter the settings, access metering data, review self-test
status, retrieve event summaries, and obtain motor operating statistics reports.

Required Equipment
To connect a PC serial port to the relay front panel serial port and enter relay
commands, the following equipment is required:
A personal computer equipped with one available EIA-232 serial port
A standard null-modem communication cable to connect the computer
serial port to the relay serial port
Terminal emulation software to control the computer serial port
The 825-P Relay
On most personal computers, the connector for the EIA-232 serial port is a 9-pin
D subconnector. You can purchase the cable to connect the computer port to
the relay port from most computer hardware retailers, or you can build your own
cable using the pinouts shown in Table 53.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

161

Chapter 12

ASCII Serial Communications

You can use a variety of terminal emulation programs on your PC to


communicate with the 825-P. Examples of PC-based terminal emulation
programs include:
ProComm Plus
Relay/Gold
Microsoft Windows HyperTerminal
SmartCOM
CROSSTALK
Tera Term

Connect Your PC to the Relay


Connect the PC serial port to the 825-P serial port using a standard null-modem
communication cable with the pinout shown in Figure 53. For best performance,
the cable should not be more than 15 meters (50 feet) long.
Figure 53 - Serial Cable Pinout
1

825-P Relay
9-Pin Male
D Subconnector
Pin Function
RXD
TXD
GND
CTS

Pin #
2
3
5
8

DTE Device
9-Pin Female
D Subconnector
Pin #
3
2
5
8
7
1
4
6

Pin Function
TXD
RXD
GND
CTS
RTS
DCD
DTR
DSR

DTE = Data Terminal Equipment (e.g., computer, terminal)

Figure 54 shows the front-panel EIA-232 serial port (PORT F) DB-9 connector
pinout for the 825-P. Table 95 shows the pin functions and definitions for the
serial port.
Figure 54 - DB-9 Connector Pinout for EIA-232 Serial Ports
5 4
9 8

162

3 2

7 6

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

ASCII Serial Communications

Chapter 12

Table 95 - Pin Functions and Definitions for EIA-232 Serial Port (Port F)
Pin

Pin Function

Definition

1, 4, 6

N/C

No connection

RXD, RX

Receive data

TXD, TX

Transmit data

5, 9

GND

Signal ground

RTS

Request to send

CTS

Clear to send

Configure Your Terminal Emulation Software


Personal computers use terminal emulation software to send and interpret
received characters at the EIA-232 serial port. This software allows you to type
letters and numbers to form commands at the computer keyboard and to see the
characters you type and the relay responses on the computer screen. To ensure
the PC communicates correctly with the relay, configure the terminal emulation
software connection properties to match the relay serial port configuration.
Configure the terminal emulation software to match the default settings shown
in Table 96. For the best display, use VT-100 terminal emulation. If VT-100 is
not available, WYSE-100 and ANSI terminal emulations also work.
Table 96 - 825-P Relay Serial Communications Default Settings
Setting

Default

Speed (bps)

9600

Data Bits

Parity

Stop Bits

Flow Control

XON/XOFF (software flow control)

To change the port settings, use the front-panel SET/SHOW > PORT settings
menu item.

Serial Port Settings

The 825-P provides settings that allow you to configure the communication
parameters for the front-panel serial port. The front-panel serial port supports
only ASCII communications.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

163

Chapter 12

ASCII Serial Communications

Table 97 - Front Panel Serial Port Settings


Setting Prompt

Setting Range

Factory Default

SPEED

30038400 bps

9600

DATA BITS

7, 8 bits

PARITY

O, E, N

STOP BITS

1, 2 bits

PORT TIMEOUT

030 min

15

HDWR HANDSHAKING

Y, N

The 825-P front-panel serial port supports EIA-232 communication of ASCII


text data. Table 97 shows relay serial port settings for the front-panel port. Set the
Baud Rate, Data Bits, Parity, and Stop Bits settings to match the serial port
configuration of the equipment that is communicating with the serial port.
After Port Timeout minutes of inactivity on a serial port at Access Level 2, the
port automatically returns to Access Level 1. This security feature helps prevent
unauthorized access to the relay settings if the relay is accidentally left in Access
Level 2. If you do not want the port to time out, set Timeout equal to 0 minutes.
The relay EIA-232 serial ports support software (XON/XOFF) flow control. If
you want to enable support for hardware (RTS/CTS) flow control, set the Enable
Hardware Handshaking setting equal to Y.

Using Terminal Commands


When you type commands at the terminal emulation window, type either the
entire command or just use the first three letters (e.g., the following commands
instruct the relay to display metering data):
Type METER (or MET) and press Enter.

Use upper- or lower-case characters when typing commands; however, password


entry is case sensitive. Table 99 lists user commands that the relay accepts at the
EIA-232 serial port.
The relay serial port uses software flow control, meaning that character
transmission is controlled by receipt of XON and XOFF characters. When the
relay receives the XOFF character during transmission, it pauses until it receives
an XON character. If a message is not in progress when the relay receives the
XOFF character, it blocks transmission of a message presented to its buffer.
Messages are transmitted after the relay receives the XON character.
You can send control characters from most keyboards using the keystrokes listed
in Table 98.

164

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

ASCII Serial Communications

Chapter 12

Table 98 - Serial Port Control Characters


Control Characters

Key Commands

XON

Ctrl+Q

XOFF

Ctrl+S

CAN

Ctrl+X

You can use the XOFF character to pause in the middle of long transmissions
from the relay. To resume the transmission, use the XON character. To cancel a
transmission in progress, use the Ctrl+X key commands.

Serial Port Access Levels


Issue commands to the relay via the front serial port, e.g., to view metering values
or change the relay settings. Refer to Table 99 available serial port commands.
Access these commands only from the corresponding access level, as listed
in the table.

Access levels are:


Access Level 0 (the lowest access level)
Access Level 1
Access Level 2 (the highest access level)

Access Level 0
Once serial port communications are established with the relay, the relay displays
the = prompt (an equal sign). This is referred to as Access Level 0. The only
command available at Access Level 0 is the ACC command (see Table 99). Type
ACC at the Access Level 0 prompt and then press Enter. The ACC command
takes the relay to Access Level 1.

Access Level 1
The Access Level 1 commands primarily allow you to view information (such as
settings and metering) but not to change settings. When the relay is in Access
Level 1, the relay sends the prompt: =>. Type 2AC at the prompt and then press
Enter to take the relay to Access Level 2.

Access Level 2
The Access Level 2 commands primarily allow you to change relay settings, reset
data buffers, and control relay outputs. If left in Access Level 2, the serial port
automatically returns to Access Level 1 after a settable inactivity period. All
Access Level 1 commands are also available in Access Level 2. When the relay is in

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

165

Chapter 12

ASCII Serial Communications

Access Level 2, the relay sends the = > > prompt at which you press Enter or after
a command response is finished.

Command Summary
Table 99 lists the serial port commands associated with particular activities. The
commands are shown in upper-case letters, but they can also be entered with
lower-case letters.
Table 99 - 825-P Serial Port Command Summary
Serial Port
Command

Access
Level

Command Description

Page
Number

2ACCESS

1, 2

Go to Access Level 2.

Page 167

ACCESS

0, 2

Go to Access Level 1.

Page 167

ANALOG

Test analog output.

Page 167

DATE

1, 2

View or Change date.

Page 167

METER

1, 2

Display metering data.

Page 168

MOTOR

1, 2

Display motor operating statistics report.

Page 170

MOTOR R or C

Reset motor operating statistics.

Page 170

PASSWORD

View or Change password.

Page 170

QUIT

1, 2

Go to Access Level 0.

Page 171

SER

1, 2

View serialized events recording data.

Page 171

SER R or C

1, 2

Reset serialized events recording data.

Page 171

SET

Enter or Change relay settings.

Page 172

SHOW

1, 2

Show/view relay settings.

Page 173

STATUS

1, 2

Display relay self-test status.

Page 174

STATUS R or C

Clear self-test status and restart relay.

Page 177

STOP

Stop motor.

Page 177

STR

Start motor.

Page 177

SUMMARY

1, 2

View event summary reports.

Page 177

SUMMARY R or C

1, 2

Reset event summary buffer.

Page 178

TARGET

1, 2

Display relay elements, inputs or outputs status.

Page 178

TARGET R

Reset trip/target LEDs.

Page 179

TIME

1, 2

View or Change time.

Page 179

The serial port command explanations that follow in the Description of


Commands subsection are in alphabetical order to correspond with Table 99.

166

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

ASCII Serial Communications

Description of Commands

Chapter 12

Each command explanation lists:


Command.
Serial port access levels where the command is available, in parentheses.
Explanation of the command use or response.
For example, issue the DATE command from serial port Access Level 1 or 2.

ACC and 2AC (Level 1 or 2)


The ACC and 2AC commands provide entry to the multiple access levels.
Different commands are available at the different access levels, as shown in
Table 99. Commands ACC and 2AC operate similarly:
ACC command moves the relay from Access Level 0 to Access Level 1 or
Access Level 2 to Access Level 1.
2AC command moves the relay from Access Level 1 to Access Level 2.
The relay is shipped from the factory with the Access Level 1 and Access Level 2
passwords disabled. See PASSWORD (Level 1 or 2) on page 170 for
information on Access Level 1 and Access Level 2 password protection.
The relay sets the SALARM Relay Word bit for one second after a successful
move to Access Level 2.

ANALOG (Level 2)
Use the ANALOG p t command to test the relay analog current output. When
you use this command, the relay ends normal analog current output and sends a
signal defined by the percentage value, p = 0100% for t minutes (t = 110
minutes). For example, when the analog output signal type is 420 mA, the
command ANA 75 5.5 instructs the relay to output 16 mA (75% of full scale) for
5.5 minutes or until a character or space key is pressed to end the test.
You can also use the ANALOG command to generate a current signal that
increases linearly. Replace the fixed percentage value with an R to ramp the signal
from zero to full scale over time. For example, the command ANA R 10 instructs
the relay to ramp the analog signal from zero to full scale, reaching full scale in 10
minutes. Stop the test by pressing a keyboard character key or the space bar.

DATE (Level 1 or 2)
DATE displays the date stored by the internal calendar/clock.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

167

Chapter 12

ASCII Serial Communications

If the date format setting DATE_F is set to MDY, the date is displayed as
month/day/year. If the date format setting is set to YMD, the date is displayed as
year/month/day and for DMY it is displayed as day/month/year.
To set the date (and the date format setting is MDY), type DATE mm/dd/yyyy
and then press Enter.
To set the date for a date format setting of YMD, type DATE yyyy/mm/dd and
then press Enter.
To set the date for a date format setting of DMY, type DATE dd/mm/yyyy and
then press Enter.
You can separate the month, day, and year parameters with spaces, commas,
slashes, colons, or semicolons.

METER (Level 1 or 2)
The METER commands provide access to the relay metering data. The relay
divides the displayed information into two groups:
Note: All ASCII command responses in this section are examples only. Your
specific relay has differences based on model number, firmware revision number,
and application.
Instantaneous
Thermal and RTD

METER k (Instantaneous Metering)


The METER k command displays instantaneous magnitudes (and angles, if
applicable) of the measured and calculated analog quantities.
All angles are displayed between 180 and +180 degrees. For delta-connected
PTs, angles are referenced to VAB or L1 and for wye-connected PTs, angles are
referenced to VAN or L1.
If the voltage channels are not supported, or VAB < 13V (for delta) or
VAN < 13V (for wye), angles are referenced to L1 current.
To view the instantaneous meter values once, use the METER command (see the
example in Figure 55). To view the meter values k times, use the METER k
command, where k is a number between 1 and 32767.

168

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

ASCII Serial Communications

Chapter 12

Figure 55 - View Instantanious Meter Values Once - Example


=>>MET
825-P Modular
Prot. System

Date: 03/05/2003

Time: 16:44:08.404

L1
L2
L3
Current Magnitude (A)
21.2
21.3
21.5
Current Angle (deg)
-42.0
-162.5
78.2
Average Current Magnitude (A)
21.3
Motor Load (x Ie)
0.9
GF Current-Core Balance (A)
0.00
GF Current-Core Balance Angle (deg) -76.6
GF Current-Residual (A)
0.0
GF Current-Residual Angle (deg)
72.3
Current Imbalance (%)
1.0
VAN
VBN
VCN
VG
Voltage Magnitude L-N (V)
334
334
334
Voltage Angle (deg)
0.0
-119.6
120.8
Average Phase (V)
334
Voltage Imbalance (%)
0.0
Real Power (kW)
16
Reactive Power (kVAR)
14
Apparent Power (kVA)
21
Power Factor
0.74 LAG
Frequency (Hz)
=>>

4
-116.1

60.0

METER T (Thermal and RTD Metering)


The METER T command displays the temperatures of any connected RTDs.
This command also shows the average motor current (x Ie), the present
% Thermal Capacity used, and the RTD % Thermal Capacity (if ambient and
winding temperatures are monitored and a winding RTD trip temperature is set).
If the motor is in overload, this command response shows the calculated time to a
thermal trip. If the motor is not in overload (e.g., see Figure 56), the time shown is
9999 seconds. The Starts Available and Time To Reset values are also displayed.
Figure 56 - Calculated Time to a Thermal Trip - Example
=>>MET T
825-P Modular
Date: 03/05/2003
Prot. System
Max Winding RTD = 61 C
Max Bearing RTD = 48 C
Ambient RTD
= 28 C
Max Other RTD
= 50 C
RTD 1 WDG = 61 C
RTD 2 NONE
RTD 3 WDG = 59 C
RTD 4 WDG = 58 C
RTD 5 WDG = Open
RTD 6 WDG = 57 C
RTD 7 BRG = 48 C
RTD 8 BRG = 46 C
RTD 9 BRG = 45 C
RTD 10 BRG = 44 C
RTD 11 AMB = 28 C
RTD 12 OTH = 50 C
Motor Load (x Ie)
0.9
Thermal Capacity Used (%)
32
RTD % Thermal Capacity (%)
27
Calculated Time to Thermal Trip (sec)
9999
Time to Reset (min)
0

Time: 16:13:50.321

=>>

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

169

Chapter 12

ASCII Serial Communications

MOTOR (Level 1 or 2)
The MOTOR command displays the motor operating statistics that include the
following:
Motor running time, stopped time, and percent time running.
Total number of motor starts.
Number of emergency starts.
Chapter 7, Metering & Monitoring, includes additional details on the motor
operating statistics report. Issuing the MOTOR R or MOTOR C command
from Access Level 2 clears the report.

PASSWORD (Level 1 or 2)
NOTE:

This device is shipped with Access Level 1 and Access Level 2 password protection disabled.
Access Level 1 and Access Level 2 password protection must be restored at installation.
Failure to install Access Level 1 and Access Level 2 private passwords could allow
unauthorized access. Rockwell Automation is not be responsible for damage resulting
from unauthorized access.

The Access Level 2 PAS command allows you to inspect or change the existing
password. To inspect the Access Level 1 and Access Level 2 passwords, type PAS
and then press Enter.
The relay displays the present passwords.
The factory ships the relay with the passwords disabled.
For example, to change the password for Access Level 2 to BIKE, type PAS 2
BIKE and then press Enter.
After entering the new password, type PAS and then press Enter to inspect it.
If the password is correct, record it for future reference. If you make three
incorrect password guesses, access is denied and the SALARM Relay Word bit is
set for one second.
The password can include up to eight characters. Valid characters consist of all
printable characters from the 7-bit ASCII set typically found on the PC
keyboard. The space character is not included.
Strong passwords consist of eight characters, with at least one special character or
digit and mixed-case sensitivity, but do not form a name, date, acronym, or word.
Passwords formed in this manner are less susceptible to password guessing and
automated attacks.

170

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

ASCII Serial Communications

Chapter 12

To disable password protection for Access Level 1 or Access Level 2, set its
password to DISABLE.

QUIT (Level 1 or 2)
The QUI command returns the relay to Access Level 0 from either Access Level 1
or Access Level 2.

SER (Level 1 or 2)
Use the SER command to view the Serialized Events Recording (SER) report,
described in detail in Chapter 8: Analyzing Events.
Each event record is stored with a record number, a date, and a time. You can
access SER data by record number or by date. The most recent record is always
record number 1. The various SER command options are shown in Table 100.
Table 100 - SER Command Options
Serial Port Command

Description

SER

Display all SER records.

SER n

Display the n most recent SER records starting with record n.

SER n1 n2

Display SER records n2 to n1, starting with n2

SER d1

Display all SER records made on date d1

SER d1 d2

Display all SER records made from dates d2 to d1, inclusive, starting with d2

The date entries used with the SER command are dependent on the Date Format
setting. If the Date Format setting equals MDY, then use the format mm/dd/yyyy
for entered dates. If the Date Format setting equals YMD, then use the format
yyyy/mm/dd for the entered dates. If the Date Format setting equals DMY, then
use the format dd/mm/yyyy for the entered dates.
If the requested SER records do not exist, the relay displays the message No SER
Data.

SER R or C (Level 1 and 2)


The SER R or SER C command removes the SER data from nonvolatile
memory.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

171

Chapter 12

ASCII Serial Communications

SET (Level 2)
The SET command allows you to view or change the relay settings.
Table 101 - Serial Port SET Commands
Command

Settings Type

Description

SET

Relay

Protection elements, timers, etc.

SET P

Port

Serial port settings for Serial Port F

SET M

Relay

I/O mapping settings

When you issue the SET command, the relay presents a list of settings one at a
time. Enter a new setting or press Enter to accept the existing setting. Editing
keystrokes are shown in Table 102.
Table 102 - SET Command Editing Keystrokes
Do the Following

Results

Press Enter

Retains setting and moves to next setting.

Type ^ and then press Enter

Returns to previous setting.

Type < and then press Enter

Returns to previous setting category.

Type > and then press Enter

Moves to the next setting category.

Type END and then press Enter

Exits editing session, then prompts you to save settings.

Press Ctrl+ X

Aborts editing session without saving changes.

The relay checks each entry to ensure that it is within the setting range. If it is not,
an Out of Range message is generated, and the relay prompts you for the setting
again.
When all the settings are entered, the relay displays the new settings and prompts
you for approval to enable them. Type Y and then press Enter to enable the new
settings. The relay is disabled for as long as five seconds while it saves the new
settings. The SALARM Relay Word bit is set momentarily and the ENABLE
LED extinguishes while the relay is disabled.
To change a specific setting, enter the command shown in Table 103.
Table 103 - SET Command Format
SET n s TERSE
Where:

172

is left blank to enter relay settings.

is P to enter front serial port settings.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

ASCII Serial Communications

Chapter 12

Table 103 - SET Command Format


SET n s TERSE
n

is M to enter I/O mapping settings.

is the short parameter name of the specific setting you want to jump to and begin setting.
If s is not entered, the relay starts at the first setting (e.g., enter 50PIP to start at Short Circuit Trip
level setting).

TERSE

instructs the relay to skip the settings display after the last setting.
Use this parameter to speed up the SET command.
If you want to review the settings before saving, do not use the TERSE option.

SHOW
Use the SHOW command to view relay settings and serial port settings (see
Figure 61. The SHOW command options are listed in Table 104.
Table 104 - SHOW Command Options
Command

Description

SHOW

Show relay settings.

SHO A

Show all relay settings: enabled, disabled/hidden.

SHO P

Show serial port settings.

SHO M

Show I/O mapping settings.

You can append a setting name to each of the commands to specify the first
setting to display (e.g., SHO 50P1P displays the relay settings starting with
setting 50P1P). The default is the first setting.
The SHOW command displays only the enabled settings. To display all the
settings, including disabled/hidden settings, append an A to the SHOW
command (e.g., SHOW A).

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

173

Chapter 12

ASCII Serial Communications

Figure 57 - SHOW Command Example


=>SHO
RID
:=825-P Modular
TID
:=Prot. System
PHROT
:= ABC
FNOM
:=
FLA1
:= 25.0
E2SPEED :=
VNOM
:= 600
DELTA_Y :=
E49MOTOR:= Y
49RSTMD :=
LRA1
:= 12.0
LRTHOT1 :=
TCAPU
:= 85
TCSTART :=
50P1P
:= OFF
50P2P
:=
50G1P
:= OFF
50G2P
:=
LJTPU
:= OFF
LJAPU
:=
LLTPU
:= OFF
LLAPU
:=
46UBT
:= OFF
46UBA
:=
THERBL_T:= OFF
START_T := OFF
ESTAR_D := N
MAXSTART:= OFF
TBSDLY :=
ABSDLY := OFF
E47T
:= N
SPDSDLYT:= OFF
SPDSDLYA:=
EPTC
:= N
E49RTD := Y
RTDRST :=
TRTMP1 := 150
ALTMP1 :=
RTD3TY := PT100
TRTMP3 :=
RTD4TY := PT100
TRTMP4 :=
RTD5TY := PT100
TRTMP5 :=
RTD6TY := PT100
TRTMP6 :=
RTD7TY := PT100
TRTMP7 :=
RTD8TY := PT100
TRTMP8 :=
RTD9TY := PT100
TRTMP9 :=
RTD10TY := PT100
TRTMP10 :=
RTD11TY := PT100
TRTMP11 :=
RTD12TY := PT100
TRTMP12 :=
EBRGV
:= N
ERTDBIAS:=
27P1P
:= OFF
27P2P
:=
59P1P
:= OFF
59P2P
:=
NVARTP := OFF
PVARTP :=
37PTP
:= OFF
37PAP
:=
55LGTP := 0.50
55LDTP :=
55LDAP := OFF
55AD
:=
81D1TP := OFF
81D1AP :=
81D2TP := OFF
81D2AP := OFF
LOAD
:= OFF
AOPARM := LOAD_I
BLK46
:= N
BLK48
:=
BLK37
:= N
BLK66
:=
TRIPFS := Y
AUX1FS :=
AUX4FS := Y
AUX5FS :=
T1ONDLY := 0
T1OFFDLY:=
FP_TO
:= 15
FP_CONT :=
FP_TD
:= N
FP_GC
:=
FP_TH
:= N
FP_VA
:=
=>

60
N
WYE
AUTO
10.0
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
10

DATE_F
CTRN

:= MDY
:= 100

49RSTP :=
TD1
:=
COOLTIME:=
50N1P
:=

75
1.00
44
OFF

CTR1
PTR

:= 5
:= 5.00

SF
:=
RTC1
:=
ETHMBIAS:=
50N2P
:=

1.00
AUTO
Y
OFF

46UBAD

:= 10

PROTBL_T:= OFF

AUTO
120
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
N
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
1
OFF

RTD1LOC
RTD2LOC
ALTMP3
ALTMP4
ALTMP5
ALTMP6
ALTMP7
ALTMP8
ALTMP9
ALTMP10
ALTMP11
ALTMP12

:=
:=
:=
:=
:=
:=
:=
:=
:=
:=
:=
:=

RTD1TY :=
RTD3LOC :=
RTD4LOC :=
RTD5LOC :=
RTD6LOC :=
RTD7LOC :=
RTD8LOC :=
RTD9LOC :=
RTD10LOC:=
RTD11LOC:=
RTD12LOC:=
EWDGV
:=

NVARAP

:= OFF

PVARAP

:= OFF

55TD

:= 1

55LGAP

:= 0.50

N
N
Y
Y
0
5
N
N

BLK50EF :=
BLK49PTC:=
AUX2FS :=
AUX6FS :=
T2ONDLY :=

OFF

OFF

FP_LA
FP_PE

WDG
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

N
N
Y
Y
0

:= N
:= N

PT100
WDG
WDG
WDG
WDG
BRG
BRG
BRG
BRG
AMB
OTH
N

BLK50P := N
BLK49RTD:= N
AUX3FS := Y
T2OFFDLY:= 0
FP_MF
FP_RTD

:= N
:= N

STATUS (Level 1 or 2)
The STATUS command displays the relay hardware and software self-test
diagnostics and resolves hardware configuration conflicts when detected (see
Figure 58).
To view a status report, enter the STATUS command. To view the status report k
times, enter the command STATUS k, where k is a number between 1 and 32767.
Table 105 shows the status report definitions and message formats for each test.

174

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

ASCII Serial Communications

Chapter 12

Table 105 - STATUS Command Report and Definitions


STATUS Report
Designator

Definition

FID

Firmware identifier string

CID

Firmware checksum identifier

Identity Code

Relay configuration identification

Message Format
(FID string)
xxxx
Identity string

Current Offset
(L1, L2, L3, RES, CB)

DC offset in hardware circuits of current channels

OK/WARN

Voltage Offset
(VA, VB, VC)

DC offset in hardware circuits of voltage channels

OK/WARN

PS_Vdc

Power supply status

OK/FAIL

FPGA

FPGA programming unsuccessful, or FPGA failed

OK/FAIL

GPSB

General Purpose Serial Bus

OK/FAIL

HMI

front panel FGPA programming unsuccessful, or front panel


FPGA failed

OK/WARN

RAM

Volatile memory integrity

OK/FAIL

ROM

Firmware integrity

OK/FAIL

CR_RAM

Integrity of settings in RAM and code that runs in RAM

OK/FAIL

Non_Vol

Integrity of data stored in nonvolatile


memory

OK/FAIL

Clk_Bat

Clock battery integrity

OK/WARN

Clock

Clock functionality

OK/WARN

PTC

Integrity of PTC

OK/FAIL

RTD

Integrity of RTD module/communications

OK/FAIL

MCM/CWE

Integrity of current board and MCM/CWE

OK/FAIL

Voltage

Integrity of voltage board

OK/FAIL

I/O_Crd

Integrity of I/O card

OK/FAIL

COM_Crd

Integrity of DeviceNet card and network

OK/FAIL

DeviceNet card specific card identification.

xxxxxx

MAC ID
ASA

Manufacturer identifier for DeviceNet.

xxxx xxxxx

DN_Rate

DeviceNet card network communications data speed

___ kbps

DN_Status

DeviceNet connection and fault status.

000b bbbb

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

175

Chapter 12

ASCII Serial Communications

Figure 58 - STATUS Command - Example


=>>STA
825-P Modular
Prot. System

Date: 03/03/2003

FID=825-P-R100-V0-Z001001-D20030225

Time: 11:54:40.361

CID=010C

Identity Code 1522001BCX0X1X1X


SELF TESTS
Current
Offset:

L1
OK

L2
OK

L3
OK

Voltage
Offset:

VA
OK

VB
OK

VC
OK

PS_Vdc
OK

FPGA
OK

GPSB
Ok

HMI
Ok

RAM
OK

ROM
OK

CR_RAM
OK

Non_Vol
OK

PTC
OK

RTD
Ok

MCM/CWE
OK

OK

MAC_ID
0

ASA
0000 0000h

RES
OK

CB
OK

Clk_Bat
Ok

Clock
OK

Voltage
OK

DN_Rate
0kbps

I/O_Crd
OK

Com_Crd

DN_Status
0000 0000

Relay Enabled
=>>

Figure 59 - Identity Code Explanation

1 5 5 2 0 0 1 B A X O X O A O X

Converter Module
X None
A 825-MCM2
B 825-MCM5
C 825-MCM20
D 825-MCM180
E 825-MCM420
F 825-MCM630N

Communication Card Expansion I/O Card


0 None
0 None
3 DeviceNet
1 Installed

Voltage Sensing Card


0 None
1 Installed

Figure 60 - DN_Status Explanation

0 0 0 0
Undefined
I/D Idle
I/O Fault
Explicit Fault
I/O Connection
Explicit Connection

176

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

0 0 0 0

ASCII Serial Communications

Chapter 12

STATUS R or C (Level 2)
To reset the self-test status and restart the relay, enter the STA R command from
Access Level 2.
The relay then restarts (like powering down and then powering up the relay) and
all diagnostics are rerun before the relay is enabled.

STOP (Level 2)
The STOP command causes the relay to trip, opening the motor contactor or
circuit breaker and stopping the motor. For more details refer to Chapter 6:
Configuring Protection & Logic Functions.

STR (Level 2)
The STR (START) command initiates a motor start using the relay's internal
logic. For more details refer to Chapter 6: Configuring Protection & Logic
Functions.

SUMMARY (Level 1 or 2)
The SUM n command displays a summary list, in reverse chronological order, of
all the archived event summary reports (maximum of five events).
An example event summary report is in Figure 61. Each event summary report
shows the date, time, current magnitudes (primary values) and, if the relay has the
voltage option, voltage magnitudes (primary values). The current and voltage
values are at the trigger instant. The event summary report also shows the event
type (e.g., OVERLOAD TRIP).
The n parameter with the SUM n command can have a value up to 5 and defines
the number of events requested. If n is not specified, then up to five of the most
recent reports are listed.
For more information on events, refer to Chapter 8, Analyzing Events.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

177

Chapter 12

ASCII Serial Communications

Figure 61 - SUMMARY Command - Example


=>>SUM 2
825-P Modular
Prot. System
Event #: 1
Event Date: 01/29/2003
CURRENT MAG (A)
Event #: 2
Event Date: 01/29/2003
CURRENT MAG (A)

Date: 02/04/2003

Time: 17:20:46.439

Event: OVERLOAD TRIP


Event Time: 14:14:01.930
L1
L2
L3
8.2
8.1
8.2
Event: OVERLOAD TRIP
Event Time: 14:13:05.931
L1
L2
L3
8.2
8.2
8.2

RES
0.0

CB
0.00

RES
0.0

CB
0.00

=>>

SUMMARY R (Level 1 and 2)


The SUMMARY R command clears all the events in the event buffer.

TARGET (Level 1 or 2)
The TARGET command displays the status of relay elements whether they are
asserted or de-asserted. The elements are represented as Relay Status bits and are
listed in rows of eight, called Relay Status rows. For additional information on
individual Relay Status bits, refer to AppendixC, Relay Word Bits.
A Relay Word bit is either at logical 1 (asserted) or at logical 0 (de-asserted).
The TAR command options are listed in Table 106.
Table 106 - TARGET Command Options
Commands

Descriptions

TAR n k

Shows Relay Word Row n (010).


k is an optional parameter to specify the number of times (132767) to repeat the Relay Word
row display.
If k is not specified, the Relay Word row is displayed once.
See Table 106 for the definition of Row 0.
See Table for a list of the Relay Word bits in each row (n = 110).

TAR name k

Shows the Relay Word bit row containing the Relay Word bit name (e.g., TAR 50P1T displays
Relay Word Row 1).
Valid names are shown in TARGET R (Level 2) on page 179.
k is an optional parameter to specify the number of times (132767) to repeat the Relay Word
bit row display.
If k is not specified, the Relay Word row is displayed once.

Table 107 - Front-Panel LEDs and the TAR 0 Command

178

LED Number/State

ALARM (Flashing)

N/A

WARNING

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

ON Steady (Latched)

ENABLE

TRIP

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

ASCII Serial Communications

Chapter 12

TARGET R (Level 2)
The TARGET R command resets the front-panel tripping targets and releases
the trip signal if the fault condition has vanished and lockout conditions are not
present. If you issue the TARGET R command at the relay serial port or use the
front-panel Test/Reset push button and the relay tripping targets do not reset,
verify that the fault condition and all lockouts have cleared.

TIME (Level 1 or 2)
The TIME command displays the relay clock (24 hours). To set the clock, type
TIME hh:mm:ss and then press Enter.
Separate the hours, minutes, and seconds with colons, semicolons, spaces,
commas, or slashes. For example, set 22:47:36 by typing TIME 22:47:36 and
then pressing Enter:

View or Change Settings with View Settings


Front Panel Serial Port

Use the SHOW command to view relay settings. The SHOW command is
available from Access Level 1 and Access Level 2.
Table 108 lists the SHOW command options.
Table 108 - SHOW Command Options
Command

Description

SHOW

Show relay settings.

SHO A

Show all relay settings: enabled, disabled/hidden.

SHO P

Show front serial port settings.

SHO M

Show I/O mapping settings.

You can append a setting name to each of the commands to specify the first
setting to display (e.g., SHO 50P1P displays the relay settings starting with
setting 50P1P). The default is the first setting.
The SHOW command displays only the enabled settings. To display all the
settings, including disabled/hidden settings, append an A to the SHOW
command (e.g., SHOW A).

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

179

Chapter 12

ASCII Serial Communications

Enter Settings
The SET command (available from Access Level 2) allows you to view or change
the settings. Table 109 lists the SET command options.
Table 109 - SET Command Options
Command

Settings Type

Description

SET

Relay

Protection elements, timers, etc.

SET P

Port

Settings for front panel Serial Port F.

SET M

Relay

Input/output mapping settings.

When you issue the SET command, the relay presents a list of settings one at a
time. Enter a new setting or press <Enter> to accept the existing setting. Editing
keystrokes are listed in Table 110.
Table 110 - SET Command Editing Keystrokes
Keystroke

Results

Press Enter

Retains setting and moves to next setting.

Type ^ and press Enter

Returns to previous setting.

Type < and press Enter

Returns to previous setting category.

Type > and press Enter

Moves to next setting category.

Type END and press Enter

Exits editing session, then prompts you to save settings.

Press Ctrl+ X

Aborts editing session without saving changes.

The relay checks each entry to ensure that the entry is within the setting range. If
it is not in range, an Out of Range message is generated, and the relay prompts
you for the setting again.
When all the settings are entered, the relay displays the new settings and prompts
you for approval to enable them. Type Y and then press Enter to enable the new
settings. The relay is disabled for as long as 5 seconds while it saves the new
settings. The ALARM Relay Word bit is set momentarily and the Enable LED
extinguishes while the relay is disabled.
The relay also runs interdependency checks between some parameters. If it
detects a configuration error between parameters a message is displayed and the
user is prompted to change settings to eliminate error before settings can be saved.

180

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

ASCII Serial Communications

Chapter 12

To change a specific setting, enter the command shown in Table 111.


Table 111 - SET Command Format
SET n s TERSE
Where:
n

is left blank to enter RELAY settings.

is P to enter front panel serial port settings.

is M to enter I/O mapping settings.

is the name of the specific setting you want to jump to and begin setting.
If s is not entered, the relay starts at the first setting (e.g., enter 50P1P to start at Short Circuit
Trip level setting).

TERSE

instructs the relay to skip the settings display after the last setting.
Use this parameter to speed up the SET command.
If you want to review the settings before saving, do not use the TERSE option.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

181

Chapter 12

182

ASCII Serial Communications

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Chapter

13

Firmware Upgrade Instructions

Overview

Rockwell Automation occasionally offers firmware upgrades to enhance the


performance of your relay. Since the 825-P relay stores firmware in flash memory,
changing physical components is not necessary. Upgrade the relay firmware by
downloading a file from a personal computer to the relay via the front panel serial
port as outlined in the following sections.

Required Equipment
Gather the following equipment before starting this firmware upgrade:
Personal computer (PC)
Terminal emulation software that supports XMODEM/CRC protocol
(e.g., Microsoft Windows HyperTerminal)
Serial communication cable (null-modem cable)
Disk containing the firmware upgrade (*.S19) file

Upgrade Instructions
The instructions below assume you have a working knowledge of your personal
computer terminal emulation software. In particular, you must be able to modify
your serial communications parameters (baud rate, data bits, parity, etc.), select
transfer protocol (XMODEM/CRC), and transfer files (e.g., send and receive
binary files).
1. If the relay is in service, open its motor control circuits.
2. Connect the PC to the front-panel serial port and enter Access Level 2.
3. Save the current relay settings.
a. Issue the following commands at the ASCII prompt:
SHO, SHO P, and SHO M.
b. Issue the L_D command to the relay.
c. Type Y and press the Enter key at the following prompt:
Disable relay to send or receive firmware (Y/N)?
d. Type Y and press the Enter key at the following prompt:
Are you sure (Y/N)?
The relay sends the BOOTLDR !> prompt.
4. Type BAU 38400 and press the Enter key.
Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

183

Chapter 13

Firmware Upgrade Instructions

This changes the baud rate of the communications port to 38400. Change the
baud rate of the PC to 38400 to match the relay.
5. Begin the transfer of new firmware to the relay by issuing the REC
command.
6. Type Y to erase the existing firmware or press the Enter key to abort.
7. Press any key (e.g., the Enter key) when the relay sends a prompt.
8. Start the file transfer.
a. Select the send file option in your communications software.
Use the XMODEM protocol and send the file that contains the new
firmware (e.g., R101xxxx.S19).
The file transfer takes less than 10 minutes at 38400 baud. After the transfer is
complete, the relay reboots and returns to Access Level 1.
Figure 62 shows the screen display for the process outlined previously in Upgrade
Instructions.
Figure 62 - Firmware File Transfer Process
=>>L_D <Enter>
Disable relay to send or receive firmware (Y/N)? Y <Enter>
Are you sure (Y/N)? Y <Enter>
Relay Disabled
!>BAU 38400 <Enter>
!>REC <Enter>
Caution! - This command erases the relays firmware.
If you erase the firmware, new firmware must be loaded into the relay
before it can be put back into service.
Are you sure you wish to erase the existing firmware? (Y/N) Y
Erasing
Erase successful
Press any key to begin transfer, then start transfer at the PC <Enter>
Upload completed successfully. Attempting a restart

9. The relay illuminates the ENABLE front-panel LED if the relay settings
were retained through the download.
If ENABLE LED is illuminated, proceed to Step 10.
If ENABLE LED is not illuminated or the front-panel displays STATUS
FAIL EEPROM FAILURE, reload the relay settings with the following steps:
a. Set the communications software settings to 9600 baud, 8 data bits, and
1 stop bit.
b. Enter Access Level 2 by issuing the 2AC command.
c. Issue the R_S command to restore the factory default settings.
The relay then reboots with the factory default settings. If the following
message appears during the restart, please contact your local
Allen-Bradley distributor.
Calibration settings lost, please call the factory!
184

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Firmware Upgrade Instructions

Chapter 13

d.
e.
f.
g.

Enter Access Level 2.


Issue STATUS command, and verify that the relay status is OK.
Set the relay clock and calendar using the DATE and TIME commands.
Set the Relay and Port settings using the following commands: SET,
SET M, and SET P.
h. Set the relay passwords with the PAS command.
10. Set the communications software settings (baud rate, number of data bits,
number of stop bits) to agree with the port settings of the 825-P.
11. Issue the STATUS command, and then verify that all relay self-test results
are OK.
12. Apply current and voltage signals to the relay.
13. Issue the METER command, and then verify that the current and voltage
signals are correct.
The relay is now ready for your commissioning procedure.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

185

Chapter 13

186

Firmware Upgrade Instructions

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

Appendix

Specifications

Electrical Ratings

Main Circuits
825 Converter Module
MCM2

MCM5

MCM20

MCM180

MCM420

MCM630N

825-MCM Converter Modules


Rated Operating Voltage Ue
IEC: 400 V AC
CSA/UL: 240V AC
Rated Impulse Strength Uimp

2.5 kV

Operating Current Range (A)

690V AC
600V AC

1,000V AC
600V AC

6 kV

8 kV

0.5-2.5

1-5

2.5-20

20-180

160-420

160-630

Rated Continuous Thermal Current


(A)

24

216

504

756

Rated Saturation Current

30

60

240

1350

3400

4600

Rated Frequency

50/60 Hz 3 Hz

Voltage Input Option Card


Rated Operating Voltage Ue

67300V AC (line-to-line)

Operating Range

0.801.1 Ue

Rated Continuous Voltage

300V AC

Rated Insulation Voltage Ui

300V AC

Rated Impulse Strength Uimp

4 kV

Rated Frequency
Transition Voltage

50/60 Hz 5 Hz
515V

2079V

PTC Thermistor Input


Type of Control Unit
Max. No. of Sensors in Series
Max. Cold Resistance of PTC Sensor
Chain

Mark A
6
1500

Trip Resistance

3400 150

Reset Resistance

1500 1650

Short Circuit Trip Resistance

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

25 10

187

Chapter A

Specifications

Control Circuits
Supply
Rated Supply Voltage Us

110240V AC, 110250V DC 2448V DC

Operating Range

0.801.1 Us

Rated Frequency (V AC)

50/60 Hz 5 Hz

Max. Power Consumption

AC: 15VA, DC: 15 W

0.801.1 Us

Output Relays
Type of Contacts

Trip
Aux1Aux 6

Rated Insulation Voltage Ui

300V AC

Rated Operating Voltage Ue

240V AC

Rated Impulse Strength Uimp

4kV

Rated Thermal Current Ithe

5A

Rated Operating Current Ie

120V AC
240V AC

Contact Rating Designation

B300

Utilization Category

AC15

Contact Reliability

5 mA @ 17V

Mechanical Durability

10000 no load operations

Pickup Time

< 10 ms

Dropout Time

< 8 ms (typical))

Form C DPDT
Form A SPDT NO

3A
1.5 A

DC Current Ratings
24V DC

0.75 A

48V DC

0.50 A

125V DC

0.30 A

250V DC

0.20 A

IN1 and IN2

IN3, IN4 and IN5

24V AC/DC

120V AC/DC (825-PIOD)


24V AC/DC (825-PIOR)

Inputs
Rated Operating Voltage Ue

Operating Range

0.801.1 Ue

Rated Insulation Voltage Ui

300V AC

Rated Impulse Strength Uimp

4kV

Rated Frequency (AC)

50/60 Hz 5 Hz

On-State Voltage

15V

79V

On-State Current (turn-on)

2 mA

2 mA

Steady State Current

15 mA

15 mA

Off-State Voltage

5V

20V

Off-State Current

0.5 mA

1 mA

Capacity at L/R = 40 ms

188

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

Specifications

Chapter A

Mechanical Ratings
Environmental
Ambient Temperature
Humidity (Operating)
Maximum Altitude
Vibration (per IEC 68-2-6)
Shock (per IEC 68-2-27)
Control Terminals
Terminal Screw
Cross Section (1 wire, stranded/solid)
Torque
Degree of Protection
Ground Screw
Terminal Screw
Torque

Storage: -40+85C (-40+185F)


Operating (open): -20+60C (-4+140F)
595% Non-condensing
2000 m
3G
30 G
M3
0.142.5 mm2/#2012 AWG
0.79 Nm/7lb-in
IP20
#6
1.4 Nm/12 Lb-in

RTD Scanner Module


Supply
Rated Supply Voltage Us
Operating Range
Rated Frequency
Max. Power Consumption
Rated Insulation Voltage Ui
Rated Impulse Strength Uimp
Pollution Degree
Environmental
Ambient Temperature Storage
Humidity (Operating)
Maximum Altitude
Vibration (per IEC 68-2-6)
Shock (per IEC 68-2-27)
Inputs
Number of input channels
Type
Compatibility
Range
Accuracy
Open Circuit Detection
Short Circuit Detection
Control Terminals
Terminal Screw
Cross Section (1 wire, stranded/solid)
Torque
Degree of Protection

110/240V AC
0.801.2 Us
50/60 Hz 5 Hz
5 VA
300V AC
4kV
2
Storage: -40+85C (-40+185F)
Operating: -20+60C (-4+140F)
595% Non-condensing
2000 m
3G
30G
12
3-wire
CU10, NI100, NI120, PT100 (per IEC 60751: 1983)
-50250C
2C
> 250C
< -50C
M3
0.252.5mm2 (2412 AWG)
0.40.6 Nm (3.55.3 Lb-in)
1P20

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

189

Chapter A

Specifications

Electromagnetic
Compatibility

Electrostatic Discharge Immunity


RF Immunity
Electrical Fast Transient/Burst Immunity
Surge Immunity

Radiated
Conducted

Test Level
8kV Air Discharge
6kV Contact Discharge
10V/m
4kV (Power)
2kV (Control and Comms)
2kV L-E
1kV L-L
Emissions
Class A
Class A

Performance Criteria

Performance Criteria 1 requires the DUT to experience no degradation or loss of performance.


Environment 2.

Metering Accuracy

Standards

Phase Currents

+2%

Average Current

+2%

Average Motor Load

+2%

Current Imbalance

+2%

Ground Fault Current (Residual)

+2%

Ground Fault Current (Core Balance)

+2%

Frequency

+0.1 Hz

Line-to-Line Voltages

+2%

Average Line-to-Line Voltage

+2%

Line-to-Neutral Voltages

+2%

Average Line-to-Neutral Voltages

+2%

Voltage Imbalance

+2%

Real 3-Phase Power (kW)

+5%

Reactive 3-Phase Power (kVAR)

+5%

Apparent 3-Phase Power (kVA)

+2%

Power Factor

+2%

RTD Temperatures

+2 C

CSA 22.2 No. 14, EN60947-5-1, UL 508

Processing
AC Current and Voltage Inputs:
Digital Filtering:

Protection and Control:

190

16 samples per power system cycle


One cycle full cosine after low-pass analog filtering. Net filtering
(analog plus digital) rejects DC and all harmonics greater than the
fundamental.
4 times per power system cycle

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

Specifications

Primary Current
Transformers

Minimum Nominal Operating Voltage

Nominal Operating Voltage of Motor

Minimum Rated Primary Current l1n


Rated Secondary Current [A]

Nominal Operating Current of Motor


825-MCM2
1

825-MCM20

25

According to power consumption in leads and measuring circuit.

Rated Frequency
Burden

825-MCM5
5P10 ext. 120%

Class and Nominal Overcurrent Protection


Power Rating

Chapter A

50/60 Hz
825-MCM2

825-MCM5

825-MCM20

Power Consumption at Maximum Rated Current


[VA/phase]

0.1

0.2

0.4

Continuous Thermal Current [A]

24

250

400

600

Thermal Current, 1 s Duration [A]


No Load

An open-circuit secondary is permitted, as the burden is provided


in the converter module circuitry.

Designation according to IEC 60044 part 2:

825-CBCT Core Balance


Current Transformer

Total Measurement Error (percentage):

5% within range up to rated nominal overcurrent


1% at rated nominal primary current

For Protection Purposes

10

Rated Nominal Overcurrent Factor:

10X rated nominal primary current

ext.
120%

Extended Rated Thermal Current:

120% of rated nominal primary current (if le motor > 87%


of rated nominal transformer current)

Ratio
Current Range
Continuous Thermal Current
Saturation Current
Thermal Current, 1 s Duration
Rated Burden at Maximum Rated Current
Rated Frequency

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

100:1
0.5...10 A
0.5 A
30 A
25 A
0.4 V A
50/60 Hz

191

Chapter A

Specifications

DeviceNet
Communication Card

Electrical (DeviceNet)
Supply Voltage

1125 V DC

Input Current

0.085 A max. / 0.035 A typical

Power Consumption

2.04 W max. / 0.84 W typical

Environmental
Ambient Temperature
Operating

-20+60C

Storage

-40+85C (-40185F)

Humidity (operating)

595% non-condensing

Vibration (per IEC 68-2-6)

5G

Shock (per IEC 68-2-27)

30G

Communication
Baud Rates

125, 250, 500 kbps

Distance (max)
@ 125 kbps

500 m (1640 ft)

@ 250 kbps

200 m (656 ft)

@ 500 kbps

100 m (328 ft)

Standards
CSA 22.2 No. 14, EN 60947-4-1, EN 60947-5-1, UL 508

192

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

Appendix

Parameter List

This appendix lists all accessible parameters of the 825-P relay in numerical order.

Overview

The setting range for each parameter is provided to assist especially for
applications where it is desirable to set values from a logic controller via a network
connection.
Information values provided include the following:

Group

DeviceNet
Param No.
1

Value

Function

Setting Range

Indicated as raw numerical values.

Scale Factor

Indicate the decimal precision associated with each parameter. This must be given close attention
when writing or reading values.

Default

Indicate the factory pre-programmed values.

Modbus Register
Read (0x03h)

Write (0x06h)

Parameter Name
HDW INPUTS

Status
2

HDW OUTPUTS

Default

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

0 = IN1

Get

1 = IN2

2 = IN3

3 = IN4

4 = IN5

5 = IN6

6 = IN7

7 = IN8

0 = AUX1

Get

1 = AUX2

2 = AUX3

3 = AUX4

4 = AUX5

5 = AUX6

Min

Max

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

193

Chapter B

Parameter List

Group

DeviceNet
Param No.
3

Modbus Register
Read (0x03h)

Write (0x06h)

Parameter Name
TRIP STATUS 1

Status
(cont.)
4

194

TRIP STATUS 2

Default

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

0 = Overload

Get

1 = Undercurrent

2 = Jam

3 = Curr.Imballance

4 = Short Circuit

5 = RTD - Wind/Bear

6 = PTC

7 = GF - Residual

8 = VAR

9 = Underpower

10 = Undervoltage

11 = Overvoltage

12 = Phase Reversal

13 = Power Factor

14 = Speed Switch

15 = GF - Core Bal.

0 = Start Time

Get

1 = Frequency 1

2 = Frequency 2

3 = RTD - Other

4 = RTD - Ambient

5 = PTC Error

6 = RTD Error

7 = MCM Error

8 = Comm Idle

9 = Comm Loss

10 = Remote Trip

11 = Comm Fault

12 = Alarm - Critical

Min

Max

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

Parameter List

Group

DeviceNet
Param No.
5

Modbus Register
Read (0x03h)

Write (0x06h)

Parameter Name
WARN STATUS 1

Status
(cont.)
6

WARN STATUS 2

Chapter B

Default

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

0 = Overload

Get

1 = Undercurrent

2 = Jam

3 = Curr.Imballance

4 = Short Circuit

5 = RTD - Wind/Bear

6 = PTC

7 = GF - Residual

8 = VAR

9 = Underpower

10 = Undervoltage

11 = Overvoltage

12 = Reserved

13 = Power Factor

14 = Speed Switch

15 = GF - Core Bal.

0 = Reserved

Get

1 = Frequency 1

2 = Frequency 2

3 = RTD - Other

4 = RTD - Ambient

5 = PTC Error

6 = RTD Error

7 = MCM Error

8 = Comm Idle

9 = Comm Loss

10 = Reserved

11 = Comm Fault

12 = Alarm - Critical

Min

Max

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

195

Chapter B

Parameter List

Group

DeviceNet
Param No.
7

Modbus Register
Read (0x03h)

Write (0x06h)

Parameter Name
MODULE STATUS

Default

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

0 = Explicit Conn.

Get/Set

1 = I/O Conn.

2 = Explicit Fault

3 = I/O Fault

4 = I/O Idle

5 = Reserved

6 = Reserved

7 = Reserved

8 = Fault

9 = Warning

10 = Starting

11 = Running

12 = Stopped

0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled

Get/Set

Min

Status
(cont.)

DeviceNet

196

Max

AUTOBAUD ENABLE

CONSUMED IO ASSY

188

150

Get/Set

10

PRODUCED IO ASSY

189

103

Get/Set

11

PROD ASSY WORD 0

447

Get/Set

12

PROD ASSY WORD 1

447

Get/Set

13

PROD ASSY WORD 2

447

Get/Set

14

PROD ASSY WORD 3

447

Get/Set

15

PROD ASSY WORD 4

447

Get/Set

16

PROD ASSY WORD 5

447

Get/Set

17

PROD ASSY WORD 6

447

Get/Set

18

PROD ASSY WORD 7

447

Get/Set

19

CONSUMED IO SIZE

Get

20

PRODUCED IO SIZE

16

Get

21

STATUS COS MASK 1

0 = Fault

Get/Set

1 = Warning

2 = IN1 Status

3 = IN2 Status

4 = IN3 Status

5 = IN4 Status

6 = IN5 Status

7 = Starting

8 = AUX1 Status

9 = AUX2 Status

10 = AUX3 Status

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

Parameter List

Group

DeviceNet
Param No.
21 (cont.)

22

23

Modbus Register
Read (0x03h)

Write (0x06h)

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

11 = AUX4 Status

Get/Set

12 = AUX5 Status

13 = AUX6 Statusr

14 = Running

15 = Stopped

0 = Reserved

Get/Set

1 = Reserved

2 = IN6 Status

3 = IN7 Status

4 = IN8 Status

5 = IN4 Status

6 = IN5 Status

7 = Reserved

8 = AUX7 Status

9 = AUX8 Status

10 = AUX9 Status

11 = AUX10 Status

0 = Overload

Get/Set

1 = Undercurrent

2 = Jam

3 = Curr.Imballance

4 = Short Circuit

5 = RTD - Wind/Bear

6 = PTC

7 = GF - Residual

8 = VAR

9 = Underpower

10 = Undervoltage

11 = Overvoltage

12 = Phase Reversal

13 = Power Factor

14 = Speed Switch

15 = GF - Core Bal

0 = Start Time

Get

1 = Frequency 1

2 = Frequency 2

3 = RTD - Other

4 = RTD - Ambient

Min

STATUS COS MASK 1


(cont.)

FAULT1 COS MASK

DeviceNet
(cont)

24

Default

Parameter Name

STATUS COS MASK 2

FAULT2 COS MASK

Chapter B

Max

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

197

Chapter B

Parameter List

Group

DeviceNet
Param No.
24 (cont.)

25

Modbus Register
Read (0x03h)

Write (0x06h)

Parameter Name

27

198

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

5 = PTC Error

Get

6 = RTD Error

7 = MCM Error

8 = Comm Idle

9 = Comm Loss

10 = Remote Trip

11 = Comm Fault

12 = Alarm - Critical

0 = Overload

Get/Set

1 = Undercurrent

2 = Jam

3 = Curr.Imballance

4 = Short Circuit

5 = RTD - Wind/Bear

6 = PTC

7 = GF - Residual

8 = VAR

9 = Underpower

10 = Undervoltage

11 = Overvoltage

12 = Phase Reversal

13 = Power Factor

14 = Speed Switch

15 = GF - Core Bal.

0 = Start Time

Get

1 = Frequency 1

2 = Frequency 2

3 = RTD - Other

4 = RTD - Ambient

5 = PTC Error

6 = RTD Error

7 = MCM Error

8 = Comm Idle

9 = Comm Loss

10 = Remote Trip

11 = Comm Fault

12 = Alarm - Critical

0
100

Get

FAULT2 COS MASK


(cont.)

WARN1 COS MASK

DeviceNet
(cont)

26

Default

Min

WARN2 COS MASK

DEVICENET VOLTAGE

Max

6500

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

Parameter List

Group

DeviceNet
Param No.
28

Modbus Register
Read (0x03h)

Write (0x06h)

Parameter Name
GRPA PR FLTSTATE

Min

Max

0 = Go to FltValue (#29)

Chapter B

Default

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

1 = Ignore Trip
29

GRPA PR FLTVALUE

0 = Open
1 = Closed

30

GRPA DN FLTSTATE

0 = Go to FltValue (#31)
1 = Ignore Trip

31

GRPA DN FLTVALUE

0 = Open
1 = Closed

32

GRPA DN IDLSTATE

0 = Go to FltValue (#33)
1 = Ignore Trip

33

GRPA DN IDLVALUE

0 = Open
1 = Closed

34

GRPB PR FLTSTATE

0 = Go to FltValue (#35)
1 = Ignore Trip

35

GRPB PR FLTVALUE

0 = Open
1 = Closed

36
Aux
Outputs

GRPB DN FLTSTATE

0 = Go to FltValue (#37)
1 = Ignore Trip

37

GRPB DN FLTVALUE

0 = Open
1 = Closed

38

GRPB DN IDLSTATE

0 = Go to FltValue (#39)
1 = Ignore Trip

39

GRPB DN IDLVALUE

0 = Open
1 = Closed

40

GRPC PR FLTSTATE

0 = Go to FltValue (#41)
1 = Ignore Trip

41

GRPC PR FLTVALUE

0 = Open
1 = Closed

42

GRPC DN FLTSTATE

0 = Go to FltValue (#43)
1 = Ignore Trip

43

GRPC DN FLTVALUE

0 = Open
1 = Closed

44

GRPC DN IDLSTATE

0 = Go to FltValue (#45)
1 = Ignore Trip

45

GRPC DN IDLVALUE

0 = Open
1 = Closed

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

199

Chapter B

Parameter List

Group

DeviceNet
Param No.
46

Modbus Register
Read (0x03h)

Write (0x06h)

Parameter Name
SET TO DEFAULTS

Miscellaneous

50

DeviceLogix

200

51

NETWORK INPUTS
116

NETWORK INPUTS
1732

Default

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

0 = No action

Get/Set

1 = Set all defaults

2 = Set DeviceNet defaults

3 = Set 825-P relay defaults

0 = Net IN1

Get

1 = Net IN2

2 = Net IN3

3 = Net IN4

4 = Net IN5

5 = Net IN6

6 = Net IN7

7 = Net IN8

8 = Net IN9

9 = Net IN10

10 = Net IN11

11 = Net IN12

12 = Net IN13

13 = Net IN14

14 = Net IN15

15 = Net IN16

0 = Net IN17

Get

1 = Net IN18

2 = Net IN19

3 = Net IN20

4 = Net IN21

5 = Net IN22

6 = Net IN23

7 = Net IN24

8 = Net IN25

9 = Net IN26

10 = Net IN27

11 = Net IN28

12 = Net IN29

13 = Net IN30

14 = Net IN31

15 = Net IN32

Min

Max

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

Parameter List

Group

DeviceNet
Param No.
52

53
DeviceLogix
(cont.)

54

55

Modbus Register
Read (0x03h)

Write (0x06h)

Parameter Name
NETWORK OUTPUTS

NETWORK OVERIDE

COMM OVERRIDE

NET OUT COS MASK

Chapter B

Default

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

0 = Net OUT1

Get

1 = Net OUT2

2 = Net OUT3

3 = Net OUT4

4 = Net OUT5

5 = Net OUT6

6 = Net OUT7

7 = Net OUT8

8 = Net OUT9

9 = Net OUT10

10 = Net OUT11

11 = Net OUT12

12 = Net OUT13

13 = Net OUT14

14 = Net OUT15

15 = Net OUT16

0 = Disabled

Get/Set

1 = Enabled

0 = Disabled

Get/Set

1 = Enabled

0 = Net OUT1

Get/Set

1 = Net OUT2

2 = Net OUT3

3 = Net OUT4

4 = Net OUT5

5 = Net OUT6

6 = Net OUT7

7 = Net OUT8

8 = Net OUT9

9 = Net OUT10

10 = Net OUT11

11 = Net OUT12

12 = Net OUT13

13 = Net OUT14

14 = Net OUT15

15 = Net OUT16

Min

Max

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

201

Chapter B

Parameter List

Group

DeviceNet
Param No.

Read (0x03h)

Write (0x06h)

101

40002

400002

Modbus Register

Parameter Name

Min

PHASE ROTATION

Max
0 = ABC

Default

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

Get/Set

Hz

Get/Set

Get/Set

1 = ACB
102

40003

400003

RATED FREQ.

0 = 50
1 = 60

103

40004

400004

DATE FORMAT

0 = MDY
1 = YMD
2 = DMY

Main
Settings

104

40005

400005

PHASE CT RATIO

5000

Get/Set

105

40006

400006

MOTOR FLA(Ie)

50000

10

Get/Set

106

40007

400007

TWO SPEED ENABLE

Get/Set

0=N
1=Y

107

40008

400008

CT RATIO-2nd

5000

Get/Set

108

40009

400009

MOTOR FLA-2nd

50000

10

Get/Set

109

40010

400010

CORE B. CT RATIO

2000

100

Get/Set

110

40011

400011

PHASE VT RATIO

100

25000

100

Get/Set

111

40012

400012

LINE VOLTAGE

100

30000

100

Get/Set

112

40013

400013

XFMR CONNECTION

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

0 = Delta
1 = Wye

113

40014

400014

OVERLOAD ENABLE

0=N
1=Y

114

40015

400015

OL RESET MODE

0 = Manual
1 = Auto

Overload
Set

115

40016

400016

OL RESET LEVEL

10

99

75

%TCU

Get/Set

116

40017

400017

SERVICE FACTOR

101

150

101

100

Get/Set

117

40018

400018

MOTOR LRC

25

120

60

10

x Ie

Get/Set

118

40019

400019

LOCKD ROTOR TIME

10

6000

100

10

Get/Set

119

40020

400020

ACCEL FACTOR

10

150

100

100

Get/Set

120

40021

400021

RUN STATE TIME K

0 = Auto

2000

min

Get/Set

121

40022

400022

MOTOR LRC - 2nd

25

120

60

10

x Ie

Get/Set

122

40023

400023

MOTOR LRT - 2nd

10

6000

100

10

Get/Set

123

40024

400024

ACCEL FACT - 2nd

10

150

100

100

Get/Set

124

40025

400025

RUN ST TC - 2nd

0 = Auto

2000

min

Get/Set

125

40026

400026

OL WARN ENABLE

Get/Set

0=N
1=Y

126

40027

400027

OL WARN LEVEL

50

99

85

%TCU

Get/Set

127

40028

400028

START INH. LEVEL

0 = Off

99

%TCU

Get/Set

128

40029

400029

STOP COOL TIME

2200

18

min

Get/Set

129

40030

400030

OL RTD BIASING

Get/Set

0=N
1=Y

202

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

Parameter List

Group

Modbus Register

DeviceNet
Param No.

Read (0x03h)

Write (0x06h)

130

40031

400031

Parameter Name

Min

SC TRIP ENABLE

Max
0=N

Chapter B

Default

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

Get/Set

1=Y

Short Ckt
Set

131

40032

400032

SC TRIP LEVEL

400

1200

1000

100

x Ie

Get/Set

132

40033

400033

SC TRIP DELAY

500

100

Get/Set

133

40034

400034

SC WARN ENABLE

Get/Set

0=N
1=Y

134

40035

400035

SC WARN LEVEL

400

1200

1000

100

x Ie

Get/Set

135

40036

400036

SC WARN DELAY

500

50

100

Get/Set

136

40037

400037

GF-CB TRIP EN

Get/Set

0=N
1=Y

GF-CB
Settings

137

40038

400038

GF-CB TRIP LEVEL

2500

100

100

Get/Set

138

40039

400039

GF-CB TRIP DELAY

500

100

Get/Set

139

40040

400040

GF-CB WARN EN

Get/Set

0=N
1=Y

140

40041

400041

GF-CB WARN LEVEL

2500

100

100

Get/Set

141

40042

400042

GF-CB WARN DELAY

500

100

Get/Set

142

40043

400043

GF-RES TRIP EN

Get/Set

0=N
1=Y

GF-Res
Settings

143

40044

400044

GF-RES TRIP LEVL

10

100

50

100

x Ie

Get/Set

144

40045

400045

GF-RES TRIP DLAY

500

100

Get/Set

145

40046

400046

GF-RES WARN EN

Get/Set

0=N
1=Y

146

40047

400047

GF-RES WARN LEVL

10

100

50

100

x Ie

Get/Set

147

40048

400048

GF-RES WARN DLAY

500

100

Get/Set

148

40049

400049

JAM TRIP ENABLE

Get/Set

0=N
1=Y

Jam
Settings

149

40050

400050

JAM TRIP LEVEL

100

600

200

100

x Ie

Get/Set

150

40051

400051

JAM TRIP DELAY

1200

10

Get/Set

151

40052

400052

JAM WARN ENABLE

Get/Set

Get/Set

0=N
1=Y

Undercurrent
Set

154

40055

400055

UC TRIP ENABLE

0=N

155

40056

400056

UC TRIP LEVEL

10

100

50

100

x Ie

Get/Set

156

40057

400057

UC TRIP DELAY

1200

50

10

Get/Set

157

40058

400058

UC WARN ENABLE

Get/Set

0=N
1=Y

158

40059

400059

UC WARN LEVEL

10

100

50

100

x Ie

Get/Set

159

40060

400060

UC WARN DELAY

1200

100

10

Get/Set

160

40061

400061

UC START INHIBIT

1500

Get/Set

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

203

Chapter B

Parameter List

Group

DeviceNet
Param No.

Read (0x03h)

Write (0x06h)

161

40062

400062

Modbus Register

Parameter Name

Min

Max

CI TRIP ENABLE

0=N

Default

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

Get/Set

1=Y

Current Imb
Set

162

40063

400063

CI TRIP LEVEL

80

15

Get/Set

163

40064

400064

CI TRIP DELAY

240

Get/Set

164

40065

400065

CI WARN ENABLE

Get/Set

0=N
1=Y

165

40066

400066

CI WARN LEVEL

80

10

Get/Set

166

40067

400067

CI WARN DELAY

240

10

Get/Set

Prot.
Disable

167

40068

400068

PROT INHIBT TIME

0 = Off

240

Get/Set

168

40069

400069

OL INHIBIT TIME

0 = Off

240

Get/Set

Start
Monitoring

169

40070

400070

START MOTOR TIME

0 = Off

240

Get/Set

170

40071

400071

STAR-DELTA ENABL

Get/Set

0=N

Star Delta
Set

1=Y
171

40072

400072

MAX STAR TIME

0 = Off

600

Get/Set

172

40073

400073

STARTS/HR

0 = Off

15

Get/Set

173

40074

400074

MIN. OFF TIME

0 = Off

150

min

Get/Set

Antibackspin

174

40075

400075

RESTART BLK TIME

0 = Off

60

min

Get/Set

Phase Rev
Set

175

40076

400076

PH REV. ENABLE

Get/Set

Speed Sw
Set

176

40077

400077

SS TRIP DELAY

0 = Off

240

Get/Set

177

40078

400078

SS WARN DELAY

0 = Off

240

Get/Set

178

40079

400079

PTC ENABLE

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Start Inhbt

PTC Settings

0=N
1=Y

0=N
1=Y

179

40080

400080

PTC RESET MODE

0 = Manual
1 = Auto

180

40081

400081

RTD ENABLE

0=N
1=Y

181

40082

400082

RTD RESET MODE

0 = Manual
1 = Auto

182

40083

400083

RTD1 LOCATION

0 = Off
1 = Wdg
2 = Brg
3 = Amb
4 = Oth

Get/Set

183

40084

400084

RTD1 TYPE

0 = Pt100
1 = Ni100
2 = Ni120
3 = Cu10

Get/Set

184

40085

400085

RTD1 TRIP LEVEL

0 = Off

250

Get/Set

185

40086

400086

RTD1 WARN LEVEL

0 = Off

250

Get/Set

RTD
Settings

204

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

Parameter List

Group

Modbus Register

DeviceNet
Param No.

Read (0x03h)

Write (0x06h)

186

40087

400087

RTD2 LOCATION

187

40088

400088

RTD2 TYPE

188

40089

400089

RTD2 TRIP LEVEL

0 = Off

189

40090

400090

RTD2 WARN LEVEL

0 = Off

190

40091

400091

RTD3 LOCATION

191

40092

400092

RTD3 TYPE

192

40093

400093

RTD3 TRIP LEVEL

0 = Off

193

40094

400094

RTD3 WARN LEVEL

0 = Off

194

40095

400095

RTD4 LOCATION

195

40096

400096

RTD4 TYPE

196

40097

400097

RTD4 TRIP LEVEL

0 = Off

197

40098

400098

RTD4 WARN LEVEL

0 = Off

198

40099

400099

RTD5 LOCATION

199

40100

400100

RTD5 TYPE

200

40101

400101

RTD5 TRIP LEVEL

0 = Off

201

40102

400102

RTD5 WARN LEVEL

0 = Off

202

40103

400103

RTD6 LOCATION

203

40104

400104

RTD6 TYPE

204

40105

400105

RTD6 TRIP LEVEL

0 = Off

205

40106

400106

RTD6 WARN LEVEL

0 = Off

206

40107

400107

RTD7 LOCATION

Parameter Name

RTD
Settings
(cont.)

Chapter B

Default

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

0 = Off
1 = Wdg
2 = Brg
3 = Amb
4 = Oth

Get/Set

0 = Pt100

Get/Set

250

Get/Set

250

Get/Set

0 = Off
1 = Wdg
2 = Brg
3 = Amb

Get/Set

0 = Pt100

Get/Set

250

Get/Set

250

Get/Set

0 = Off
1 = Wdg
2 = Brg
3 = Amb
4 = Oth

Get/Set

0 = Pt100
1 = Ni100
2 = Ni120
3 = Cu10

Get/Set

250

Get/Set

250

Get/Set

0 = Off

Get/Set

0 = Pt100

Get/Set

250

Get/Set

250

Get/Set

0 = Off
1 = Wdg
2 = Brg
3 = Amb
4 = Oth

Get/Set

0 = Pt100
1 = Ni100
2 = Ni120
3 = Cu10

Get/Set

250

Get/Set

250

Get/Set

Get/Set

Min

Max

0 = Off
1 = Wdg
2 = Brg
3 = Amb

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

205

Chapter B

Parameter List

Group

DeviceNet
Param No.

Read (0x03h)

Write (0x06h)

207

40108

400108

RTD7 TYPE

208

40109

400109

RTD7 TRIP LEVEL

0 = Off

209

40110

400110

RTD7 WARN LEVEL

0 = Off

210

40111

400111

RTD8 LOCATION

211

40112

400112

RTD8 TYPE

212

40113

400113

RTD8 TRIP LEVEL

0 = Off

213

40114

400114

RTD8 WARN LEVEL

0 = Off

214

40115

400115

RTD9 LOCATION

215

40116

400116

RTD9 TYPE

216

40117

400117

RTD9 TRIP LEVEL

0 = Off

217

40118

400118

RTD9 WARN LEVEL

0 = Off

218

40119

400119

RTD10 LOCATION

219

40120

400120

RTD10 TYPE

220

40121

400121

RTD10 TRIP LEVEL

0 = Off

221

40122

400122

RTD10 WARN LEVEL

0 = Off

222

40123

400123

RTD11 LOCATION

RTD
Settings
(cont.)

206

Modbus Register

Parameter Name

Default

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

Get/Set

250

Get/Set

250

Get/Set

0 = Off
1 = Wdg
2 = Brg
3 = Amb
4 = Oth

Get/Set

0 = Pt100
1 = Ni100
2 = Ni120
3 = Cu10

Get/Set

250

Get/Set

250

Get/Set

0 = Off
1 = Wdg
2 = Brg
3 = Amb
4 = Oth

Get/Set

0 = Pt100
1 = Ni100
2 = Ni120
3 = Cu10

Get/Set

250

Get/Set

250

Get/Set

0 = Off
1 = Wdg
2 = Brg
3 = Amb
4 = Oth

Get/Set

0 = Pt100
1 = Ni100
2 = Ni120
3 = Cu10

Get/Set

250

Get/Set

250

Get/Set

Get/Set

Min

Max
0 = Pt100
1 = Ni100
2 = Ni120
3 = Cu10

0 = Off
1 = Wdg
2 = Brg
3 = Amb
4 = Oth

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

Parameter List

Group

RTD
Settings
(cont.)

Modbus Register

DeviceNet
Param No.

Read (0x03h)

Write (0x06h)

223

40124

400124

RTD11 TYPE

224

40125

400125

RTD11 TRIP LEVEL

0 = Off

225

40126

400126

RTD11 WARN LEVEL

0 = Off

226

40127

400127

RTD12 LOCATION

227

40128

400128

RTD12 TYPE

228

40129

400129

RTD12 TRIP LEVEL

0 = Off

229

40130

400130

RTD12 WARN LEVEL

0 = Off

230

40131

400131

WIND TRIP VOTING

Parameter Name

Chapter B

Default

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

Get/Set

250

Get/Set

250

Get/Set

0 = Off
1 = Wdg
2 = Brg
3 = Amb
4 = Oth

Get/Set

0 = Pt100
1 = Ni100
2 = Ni120
3 = Cu10

Get/Set

250

Get/Set

250

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Min

Max
0 = Pt100
1 = Ni100
2 = Ni120
3 = Cu10

0=N
1=Y

231

40132

400132

BEAR TRIP VOTING

0=N
1=Y

232

40133

400133

TMP RTD BIASING

0=N
1=Y

233

40134

400134

UV TRIP ENABLE

0=N
1=Y

Undervoltage
Set

234

40135

400135

UV TRIP LEVEL

60

100

80

100

x Vnm

Get/Set

235

40136

400136

UV TRIP DELAY

1200

10

Get/Set

236

40137

400137

UV WARN ENABLE

Get/Set

0=N
1=Y

237

40138

400138

UV WARN LEVEL

60

100

80

100

x Vnm

Get/Set

238

40139

400139

UV WARN DELAY

1200

10

Get/Set

239

40140

400140

OV TRIP ENABLE

Get/Set

0=N
1=Y

Overvoltage
Set

240

40141

400141

OV TRIP LEVEL

100

120

110

100

x Vnm

Get/Set

241

40142

400142

OV TRIP DELAY

1200

10

Get/Set

242

40143

400143

OV WARN ENABLE

Get/Set

0=N
1=Y

243

40144

400144

OV WARN LEVEL

100

120

110

100

x Vnm

Get/Set

244

40145

400145

OV WARN DELAY

1200

10

Get/Set

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

207

Chapter B

Parameter List

Group

DeviceNet
Param No.

Read (0x03h)

Write (0x06h)

245

40146

400146

NEG VAR TRIP EN

246

40147

400147

NEG VAR TRIP LEV

247

40148

400148

POS VAR TRIP EN

Modbus Register

Parameter Name

Min

Max
0=N

2500
0=N

Default

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

Get/Set

2500

kVAR

Get/Set

Get/Set

1=Y

VAR
Settings

248

40149

400149

POS VAR TRIP LEV

2500

2500

kVAR

Get/Set

249

40150

400150

VAR TRIP DELAY

240

Get/Set

250

40151

400151

NEG VAR WARN EN

Get/Set

2500

kVAR

Get/Set

Get/Set

0=N
1=Y

251

40152

400152

NEG VAR WARN LEV

252

40153

400153

POS VAR WARN EN

2500
0=N
1=Y

253

40154

400154

POS VAR WARN LEV

2500

2500

kVAR

Get/Set

254

40155

400155

VAR WARN DELAY

240

Get/Set

255

40156

400156

UP TRIP ENABLE

Get/Set

0=N
1=Y

Underpower
Set

256

40157

400157

UP TRIP LEVEL

2500

2500

kW

Get/Set

257

40158

400158

UP TRIP DELAY

240

Get/Set

258

40159

400159

UP WARN ENABLE

Get/Set

0=N
1=Y

259

40160

400160

UP WARN LEVEL

2500

2500

kW

Get/Set

260

40161

400161

UP WARN DELAY

240

Get/Set

261

40162

400162

PF LAG TRIP ENBL

Get/Set

50

100

Get/Set

Get/Set

0=N
1=Y

262

40163

400163

PF LAG TRIP LEVL

263

40164

400164

PF LD TRIP ENABL

99
0=N
1=Y

Power
Factor Set

264

40165

400165

PF LD TRIP LEVL

99

50

100

Get/Set

265

40166

400166

PF TRIP DELAY

240

Get/Set

266

40167

400167

PF LAG WARN ENBL

0=N

Get/Set

267

40168

400168

PF LAG WARN LEVL

99

50

100

Get/Set

268

40169

400169

PF LD WARN ENABL

Get/Set

0=N
1=Y

208

269

40170

400170

PF LD WARN LEVL

99

50

100

Get/Set

270

40171

400171

PF WARN DELAY

240

Get/Set

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

Parameter List

Group

Modbus Register

DeviceNet
Param No.

Read (0x03h)

Write (0x06h)

271

40172

400172

Parameter Name

Min

FREQ1 TRIP ENABL

Max
0=N

Chapter B

Default

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

Get/Set

1=Y
272

40173

400173

FREQ1 TRIP LEVEL

450

650

600

10

Hz

Get/Set

273

40174

400174

FREQ1 TRIP DELAY

2400

10

10

Get/Set

274

40175

400175

FREQ1 WARN ENABL

Get/Set

0=N
1=Y

Freq
Settings

275

40176

400176

FREQ1 WARN LEVEL

450

650

600

10

Hz

Get/Set

276

40177

400177

FREQ1 WARN DELAY

2400

10

10

Get/Set

277

40178

400178

FREQ2 TRIP ENABL

Get/Set

0=N
1=Y

278

40179

400179

FREQ2 TRIP LEVEL

450

650

600

10

Hz

Get/Set

279

40180

400180

FREQ2 TRIP DELAY

2400

10

10

Get/Set

280

40181

400181

FREQ2 WARN ENABL

Get/Set

0=N
1=Y

281

40182

400182

FREQ2 WARN LEVEL

450

650

600

10

Hz

Get/Set

282

40183

400183

FREQ2 WARN DELAY

2400

10

10

Get/Set

283

40184

400184

LOAD CONTROL SEL

Get/Set

Get/Set

0 = Off
1 = Current
2 = Power
3 = TCU

284

40185

400185

LD CTL UPP ENABL

0=N
1=Y

Load
Control Set

285

40186

400186

LD CTL CUR UPPER

20

200

50

10

x Ie

Get/Set

286

40187

400187

LD CTL PWR UPPER

25000

22500

kW

Get/Set

287

40188

400188

LD CTL TCU UPPER

99

90

%TCU

Get/Set

288

40189

400189

LD CTL LOW ENABL

Get/Set

0=N
1=Y

289

40190

400190

LD CTL CUR LOWER

20

200

50

10

x Ie

Get/Set

290

40191

400191

LD CTL PWR LOWER

25000

12500

kW

Get/Set

291

40192

400192

LD CTL TCU LOWER

99

90

%TCU

Get/Set

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

209

Chapter B

Parameter List

Group

DeviceNet
Param No.

Read (0x03h)

Write (0x06h)

292

40193

400193

Modbus Register

Parameter Name

Default

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

Get/Set

0 = Curr.Imbalance

Get/Set

1 = Jam

2 = Ground Fault

3 = Short Circuit

4 = Undercurrent

5 = Start Inhibit

6 = PTC

7 = RTD

0 = Trip Fail-Safe

Get/Set

1 = Aux1 Fail-Safe

2 = Aux2 Fail-Safe

3 = Aux3 Fail-Safe

4 = Aux4 Fail-Safe

5 = Aux5 Fail-Safe

6 = Aux6 Fail-Safe

Min

ANALOG OUT SEL

Max

0 = Load_I
1 = %Therm
2 = Wdg_RTD
3 = Brg_RTD
4 = PF
5 = Pwr_kW
6 = Avg_I
7 = Max_I

293

40194

400194

TRIP INHIBIT

I/O Settings

294

Timer
Settings

Front Panel
Set

210

40195

400195

RELAY BEHAVIOR

295

40196

400196

ON DELAY T1

240

Get/Set

296

40197

400197

OFF DELAY T1

240

Get/Set

297

40198

400198

ON DELAY T2

240

Get/Set

298

40199

400199

OFF DELAY T2

240

Get/Set

299

40200

400200

LCD TIMEOUT

0 = Off

30

min

Get/Set

300

40201

400201

LCD CONTRAST

Get/Set

301

40202

400202

DISPLAY ENABLE

0 = Time & Date

Get/Set

1 = Ground Current

2 = Curr. Imbalance

3 = Frequency

4 = Therm Cap Used

5 = Volt Imbalance

6 = Power

7 = RTD Temp

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

Parameter List

Group

I/O
Mapping

Modbus Register

DeviceNet
Param No.

Read (0x03h)

Write (0x06h)

302

40203

400203

303

40204

400204

Parameter Name
TRIP ASSIGN LO

TRIP ASSIGN HI

Chapter B

Default

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

0 = Overload

Get/Set

1 = Undercurrent

2 = Jam

3 = Curr. Imbalance

4 = Short Circuit

5 = RTD-Wind Bear

6 = PTC

7 = GF-Res

8 = VAR

9 = Underpower

10 = Undervoltage

11 = Overvoltage

12 = Phase Reversal

13 = Power Factor

14 = Speed Switch

15 = GF-CB

0 = Start Time

Get/Set

1 = Frequency 1

2 = Frequency 2

3 = RTD - Other

4 = RTD - Ambient

5 = PTC Error

6 = RTD Error

7 = MCM/CWE Error

8 = Comm Idle

9 = Comm Loss

10 = Remote Trip

11 = Comm Fault

12 = Reseved

13 = Reserved

14 = Reserved

15 = Reserved

Min

Max

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

211

Chapter B

Parameter List

Group

DeviceNet
Param No.

Read (0x03h)

Write (0x06h)

304

40205

400205

I/O
Mapping
(cont.)

212

305

Modbus Register

40206

400206

Parameter Name
AUX1 ASSIGN REG1

AUX1 ASSIGN REG2

Default

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

0 = Overload

Get/Set

1 = Undercurrent

2 = Jam

3 = Curr. Imbalance

4 = Short Circuit

5 = RTD-Wind Bear

6 = PTC

7 = GF-Res

8 = VAR

9 = Underpower

10 = Undervoltage

11 = Overvoltage

12 = Phase Reversal

13 = Power Factor

14 = Speed Switch

15 = GF-CB

0 = Start Time

Get/Set

1 = Frequency 1

2 = Frequency 2

3 = RTD - Other

4 = RTD - Ambient

5 = PTC Error

6 = RTD Error

7 = MCM/CWE Error

8 = Comm Idle

9 = Comm Loss

10 = Remote Trip

11 = Comm Fault

12 = Latch Trip

13 = Reserved

14 = Reserved

15 = Reserved

Min

Max

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

Parameter List

Group

I/O
Mapping
(cont.)

Modbus Register

DeviceNet
Param No.

Read (0x03h)

Write (0x06h)

306

40207

400207

307

40208

400208

Default

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

0 = RTD_Amb Warn

Get/Set

1 = SALARM

2 = Warning

3 = Load Ctl Upper

4 = Load Ctl Lower

5 = Timer 1

6 = Timer 2

7 = Short Ckt Warn

8 = Stopped

9 = Running

10 = Starting

11 = Star

12 = Delta

13 = Start

14 = Network

15 = Reserved

0 = Overload Warn

Get/Set

1 = Undercurr Warn

2 = Jam Warn

3 = Curr. Imbal Warn

4 = RTD-W, B Warn

5 = Pwr Factor Warn

6 = GF-CB Warn

7 = GF-Res Warn

8 = VAR Warn

9 = Underpower Warn

10 = Undervolt Warn

11 = Overvolt Warn

12 = Spd Switch Warn

13 = Freq1 Warn

14 = Freq2 Warn

15 = RTD-OtherWarn

Parameter Name

Min

AUX1 ASSIGN REG3

AUX1 ASSIGN REG4

Chapter B

Max

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

213

Chapter B

Parameter List

Group

DeviceNet
Param No.

Read (0x03h)

Write (0x06h)

308

40209

400209

I/O
Mapping
(cont.)

214

309

Modbus Register

40210

400210

Parameter Name
AUX2 ASSIGN REG1

AUX2 ASSIGN REG2

Default

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

0 = Overload

Get/Set

1 = Undercurrent

2 = Jam

3 = Curr. Imbalance

4 = Short Circuit

5 = RTD-Wind Bear

6 = PTC

7 = GF-Res

8 = VAR

9 = Underpower

10 = Undervoltage

11 = Overvoltage

12 = Phase Reversal

13 = Power Factor

14 = Speed Switch

15 = GF-CB

0 = Start Time

Get/Set

1 = Frequency 1

2 = Frequency 2

3 = RTD - Other

4 = RTD - Ambient

5 = PTC Error

6 = RTD Error

7 = MCM/CWE Error

8 = Comm Idle

9 = Comm Loss

10 = Remote Trip

11 = Comm Fault

12 = Latch Trip

13 = Reserved

14 = Reserved

15 = Reserved

Min

Max

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

Parameter List

Group

I/O
Mapping
(cont.)

Modbus Register

DeviceNet
Param No.

Read (0x03h)

Write (0x06h)

310

40211

400211

311

40212

400212

Default

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

0 = RTD_Amb Warn

Get/Set

1 = SALARM

2 = Warning

3 = Load Ctl Upper

4 = Load Ctl Lower

5 = Timer 1

6 = Timer 2

7 = Short Ckt Warn

8 = Stopped

9 = Running

10 = Starting

11 = Star

12 = Delta

13 = Start

14 = Network

15 = Reserved

0 = Overload Warn

Get/Set

1 = Undercurr Warn

2 = Jam Warn

3 = Curr. Imbal Warn

4 = RTD-W, B Warn

5 = Pwr Factor Warn

6 = GF-CB Warn

7 = GF-Res Warn

8 = VAR Warn

9 = Underpower Warn

10 = Undervolt Warn

11 = Overvolt Warn

12 = Spd Switch Warn

13 = Freq1 Warn

14 = Freq2 Warn

15 = RTD-OtherWarn

Parameter Name

Min

AUX2 ASSIGN REG3

AUX2 ASSIGN REG4

Chapter B

Max

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

215

Chapter B

Parameter List

Group

DeviceNet
Param No.

Read (0x03h)

Write (0x06h)

312

40213

400213

I/O
Mapping
(cont.)

216

313

Modbus Register

40214

400214

Parameter Name
AUX3 ASSIGN REG1

AUX3 ASSIGN REG2

Default

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

0 = Overload

Get/Set

1 = Undercurrent

2 = Jam

3 = Curr. Imbalance

4 = Short Circuit

5 = RTD-Wind Bear

6 = PTC

7 = GF-Res

8 = VAR

9 = Underpower

10 = Undervoltage

11 = Overvoltage

12 = Phase Reversal

13 = Power Factor

14 = Speed Switch

15 = GF-CB

0 = Start Time

Get/Set

1 = Frequency 1

2 = Frequency 2

3 = RTD - Other

4 = RTD - Ambient

5 = PTC Error

6 = RTD Error

7 = MCM/CWE Error

8 = Comm Idle

9 = Comm Loss

10 = Remote Trip

11 = Comm Fault

12 = Latch Trip

13 = Reserved

14 = Reserved

15 = Reserved

Min

Max

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

Parameter List

Group

I/O
Mapping
(cont.)

Modbus Register

DeviceNet
Param No.

Read (0x03h)

Write (0x06h)

314

40215

400215

315

40216

400216

Default

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

0 = RTD_Amb Warn

Get/Set

1 = SALARM

2 = Warning

3 = Load Ctl Upper

4 = Load Ctl Lower

5 = Timer 1

6 = Timer 2

7 = Short Ckt Warn

8 = Stopped

9 = Running

10 = Starting

11 = Star

12 = Delta

13 = Start

14 = Network

15 = Reserved

0 = Overload Warn

Get/Set

1 = Undercurr Warn

2 = Jam Warn

3 = Curr. Imbal Warn

4 = RTD-W, B Warn

5 = Pwr Factor Warn

6 = GF-CB Warn

7 = GF-Res Warn

8 = VAR Warn

9 = Underpower Warn

10 = Undervolt Warn

11 = Overvolt Warn

12 = Spd Switch Warn

13 = Freq1 Warn

14 = Freq2 Warn

15 = RTD-OtherWarn

Parameter Name

Min

AUX3 ASSIGN REG3

AUX3 ASSIGN REG4

Chapter B

Max

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

217

Chapter B

Parameter List

Group

DeviceNet
Param No.

Read (0x03h)

Write (0x06h)

316

40217

400217

I/O
Mapping
(cont.)

218

317

Modbus Register

40218

400218

Parameter Name
AUX4 ASSIGN REG1

AUX4 ASSIGN REG2

Default

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

0 = Overload

Get/Set

1 = Undercurrent

2 = Jam

3 = Curr. Imbalance

4 = Short Circuit

5 = RTD-Wind Bear

6 = PTC

7 = GF-Res

8 = VAR

9 = Underpower

10 = Undervoltage

11 = Overvoltage

12 = Phase Reversal

13 = Power Factor

14 = Speed Switch

15 = GF-CB

0 = Start Time

Get/Set

1 = Frequency 1

2 = Frequency 2

3 = RTD - Other

4 = RTD - Ambient

5 = PTC Error

6 = RTD Error

7 = MCM/CWE Error

8 = Comm Idle

9 = Comm Loss

10 = Remote Trip

11 = Comm Fault

12 = Latch Trip

13 = Reserved

14 = Reserved

15 = Reserved

Min

Max

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

Parameter List

Group

I/O
Mapping
(cont.)

Modbus Register

DeviceNet
Param No.

Read (0x03h)

Write (0x06h)

318

40219

400219

319

40220

400220

Default

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

0 = RTD_Amb Warn

Get/Set

1 = SALARM

2 = Warning

3 = Load Ctl Upper

4 = Load Ctl Lower

5 = Timer 1

6 = Timer 2

7 = Short Ckt Warn

8 = Stopped

9 = Running

10 = Starting

11 = Star

12 = Delta

13 = Start

14 = Network

15 = Reserved

0 = Overload Warn

Get/Set

1 = Undercurr Warn

2 = Jam Warn

3 = Curr. Imbal Warn

4 = RTD-W, B Warn

5 = Pwr Factor Warn

6 = GF-CB Warn

7 = GF-Res Warn

8 = VAR Warn

9 = Underpower Warn

10 = Undervolt Warn

11 = Overvolt Warn

12 = Spd Switch Warn

13 = Freq1 Warn

14 = Freq2 Warn

15 = RTD-OtherWarn

Parameter Name

Min

AUX4 ASSIGN REG3

AUX4 ASSIGN REG4

Chapter B

Max

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

219

Chapter B

Parameter List

Group

DeviceNet
Param No.

Read (0x03h)

Write (0x06h)

320

40221

400221

I/O
Mapping
(cont.)

220

321

Modbus Register

40222

400222

Parameter Name
AUX5 ASSIGN REG1

AUX5 ASSIGN REG2

Default

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

0 = Overload

Get/Set

1 = Undercurrent

2 = Jam

3 = Curr. Imbalance

4 = Short Circuit

5 = RTD-Wind Bear

6 = PTC

7 = GF-Res

8 = VAR

9 = Underpower

10 = Undervoltage

11 = Overvoltage

12 = Phase Reversal

13 = Power Factor

14 = Speed Switch

15 = GF-CB

0 = Start Time

Get/Set

1 = Frequency 1

2 = Frequency 2

3 = RTD - Other

4 = RTD - Ambient

5 = PTC Error

6 = RTD Error

7 = MCM/CWE Error

8 = Comm Idle

9 = Comm Loss

10 = Remote Trip

11 = Comm Fault

12 = Latch Trip

13 = Reserved

14 = Reserved

15 = Reserved

Min

Max

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

Parameter List

Group

I/O
Mapping
(cont.)

Modbus Register

DeviceNet
Param No.

Read (0x03h)

Write (0x06h)

322

40223

400223

323

40224

400224

Default

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

0 = RTD_Amb Warn

Get/Set

1 = SALARM

2 = Warning

3 = Load Ctl Upper

4 = Load Ctl Lower

5 = Timer 1

6 = Timer 2

7 = Short Ckt Warn

8 = Stopped

9 = Running

10 = Starting

11 = Star

12 = Delta

13 = Start

14 = Network

15 = Reserved

0 = Overload Warn

Get/Set

1 = Undercurr Warn

2 = Jam Warn

3 = Curr. Imbal Warn

4 = RTD-W, B Warn

5 = Pwr Factor Warn

6 = GF-CB Warn

7 = GF-Res Warn

8 = VAR Warn

9 = Underpower Warn

10 = Undervolt Warn

11 = Overvolt Warn

12 = Spd Switch Warn

13 = Freq1 Warn

14 = Freq2 Warn

15 = RTD-OtherWarn

Parameter Name

Min

AUX5 ASSIGN REG3

AUX5 ASSIGN REG4

Chapter B

Max

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

221

Chapter B

Parameter List

Group

DeviceNet
Param No.

Read (0x03h)

Write (0x06h)

324

40225

400225

I/O
Mapping
(cont.)

222

325

Modbus Register

40226

400226

Parameter Name
AUX6 ASSIGN REG1

AUX6 ASSIGN REG2

Default

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

0 = Overload

Get/Set

1 = Undercurrent

2 = Jam

3 = Curr. Imbalance

4 = Short Circuit

5 = RTD-Wind Bear

6 = PTC

7 = GF-Res

8 = VAR

9 = Underpower

10 = Undervoltage

11 = Overvoltage

12 = Phase Reversal

13 = Power Factor

14 = Speed Switch

15 = GF-CB

0 = Start Time

Get/Set

1 = Frequency 1

2 = Frequency 2

3 = RTD - Other

4 = RTD - Ambient

5 = PTC Error

6 = RTD Error

7 = MCM/CWE Error

8 = Comm Idle

9 = Comm Loss

10 = Remote Trip

11 = Comm Fault

12 = Latch Trip

13 = Reserved

14 = Reserved

15 = Reserved

Min

Max

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

Parameter List

Group

I/O
Mapping
(cont.)

Modbus Register

DeviceNet
Param No.

Read (0x03h)

Write (0x06h)

326

40227

400227

327

40228

400228

Default

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

0 = RTD_Amb Warn

Get/Set

1 = SALARM

2 = Warning

3 = Load Ctl Upper

4 = Load Ctl Lower

5 = Timer 1

6 = Timer 2

7 = Short Ckt Warn

8 = Stopped

9 = Running

10 = Starting

11 = Star

12 = Delta

13 = Start

14 = Network

15 = Reserved

0 = Overload Warn

Get/Set

1 = Undercurr Warn

2 = Jam Warn

3 = Curr. Imbal Warn

4 = RTD-W, B Warn

5 = Pwr Factor Warn

6 = GF-CB Warn

7 = GF-Res Warn

8 = VAR Warn

9 = Underpower Warn

10 = Undervolt Warn

11 = Overvolt Warn

12 = Spd Switch Warn

13 = Freq1 Warn

14 = Freq2 Warn

15 = RTD-OtherWarn

Parameter Name

Min

AUX6 ASSIGN REG3

AUX6 ASSIGN REG4

Chapter B

Max

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

223

Chapter B

Parameter List

Group

DeviceNet
Param No.

Read (0x03h)

Write (0x06h)

328

40229

400229

I/O
Mapping
(cont.)

224

329

Modbus Register

40230

400230

Parameter Name
IN1 ASSIGN

IN2 ASSIGN

Default

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

0=Emergency Start

Get/Set

1=Disable Settings

2=Trip Reset

3=Timer 1

4=Timer 2

5=Speed Switch

6=Block Protection

7=Speed 2

8=Bkr/Cont Aux

9=Remote Trip

10=Reserved

11=Reserved

12=Reserved

13=Reserved

14=Reserved

15=Reserved

0=Emergency Start

Get/Set

1=Disable Settings

2=Trip Reset

3=Timer 1

4=Timer 2

5=Speed Switch

6=Block Protection

7=Speed 2

8=Bkr/Cont Aux

9=Remote Trip

10=Reserved

11=Reserved

12=Reserved

13=Reserved

14=Reserved

15=Reserved

Min

Max

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

Parameter List

Group

I/O
Mapping
(cont.)

Modbus Register

DeviceNet
Param No.

Read (0x03h)

Write (0x06h)

330

40231

400231

331

40232

400232

Parameter Name
IN3 ASSIGN

IN4 ASSIGN

Chapter B

Default

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

0=Emergency Start

Get/Set

1=Disable Settings

2=Trip Reset

3=Timer 1

4=Timer 2

5=Speed Switch

6=Block Protection

7=Speed 2

8=Bkr/Cont Aux

9=Remote Trip

10=Reserved

11=Reserved

12=Reserved

13=Reserved

14=Reserved

15=Reserved

0=Emergency Start

Get/Set

1=Disable Settings

2=Trip Reset

3=Timer 1

4=Timer 2

5=Speed Switch

6=Block Protection

7=Speed 2

8=Bkr/Cont Aux

9=Remote Trip

10=Reserved

11=Reserved

12=Reserved

13=Reserved

14=Reserved

15=Reserved

Min

Max

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

225

Chapter B

Parameter List

Group

DeviceNet
Param No.

Read (0x03h)

Write (0x06h)

332

40233

400233

Modbus Register

Parameter Name
IN5 ASSIGN

I/O
Mapping
(cont.)

333

40234

400234

RESERVED

334

40235

400235

RESET TRIP

Default

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

0=Emergency Start

Get/Set

1=Disable Settings

2=Trip Reset

3=Timer 1

4=Timer 2

5=Speed Switch

6=Block Protection

7=Speed 2

8=Bkr/Cont Aux

9=Remote Trip

10=Reserved

11=Reserved

12=Reserved

13=Reserved

14=Reserved

15=Reserved

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Min

Max

0=Ready
1=Reset

335
Reset
Settings

40236

400236

SET TO DEFAULTS

0=Ready
1=Reset

336

40237

400237

RESET STAT DATA

0=Ready
1=Reset

337

40238

400238

RESET HIS DATA

0=Ready
1=Reset

Date/Time
Set

226

338

40239

400239

SET SEC

5999

100

Get/Set

339

40240

400240

SET MIN

59

Get/Set

340

40241

400241

SET HOUR

23

Get/Set

341

40242

400242

SET DAY

31

Get/Set

342

40243

400243

SET MONTH

12

Get/Set

343

40244

400244

SET YEAR

2000

9999

2000

Get/Set

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

Parameter List

Group

Current
Data

Voltage
Data

Power Data

Modbus Register

DeviceNet
Param No.

Read (0x03h)

344

Chapter B

Parameter Name

Min

Max

Default

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

40245

L1 CURRENT

65535

Get

345

40246

L1 ANGLE

-1800

1800

10

Get

346

40247

L2 CURRENT

65535

Get

347

40248

L2 ANGLE

-1800

1800

10

Get

348

40249

L3 CURRENT

65535

Get

349

40250

L3 ANGLE

-1800

1800

10

Get

350

40251

GF CURR (CORE B)

65535

Get

351

40252

GF-CB ANGLE

-1800

1800

10

Get

352

40253

GF CURR (RESID)

65535

Get

353

40254

GF-RES ANGLE

-1800

1800

10

Get

354

40255

AVERAGE CURRENT

65535

Get

355

40256

MOTOR LOAD

120

10

x Ie

Get

356

40257

CURRENT IMBAL

1000

10

Get

357

40258

VAB

65535

Get

358

40259

VAB ANGLE

-1800

1800

10

Get

359

40260

VBC

65535

Get

360

40261

VBC ANGLE

-1800

1800

10

Get

361

40262

VCA

65535

Get

362

40263

VCA ANGLE

-1800

1800

10

Get

363

40264

AVERAGE LINE

65535

Get

364

40265

VAN

65535

Get

365

40266

VAN ANGLE

-1800

1800

10

Get

366

40267

VBN

65535

Get

367

40268

VBN ANGLE

-1800

1800

10

Get

368

40269

VCN

65535

Get

369

40270

VCN ANGLE

-1800

1800

10

Get

370

40271

VG

65535

Get

371

40272

VG ANGLE

-1800

1800

10

Get

372

40273

AVERAGE PHASE

65535

Get

373

40274

VOLTAGE IMBAL

1000

10

Get

374

40275

REAL POWER

-32768

32767

kW

Get

375

40276

REACTIVE POWER

-32768

32767

kVAR

Get

376

40277

APPARENT POWER

-32768

32767

kVA

Get

377

40278

POWER FACTOR

-100

100

100

Get

Write (0x06h)

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

227

Chapter B

Parameter List

Group

DeviceNet
Param No.

Read (0x03h)

379

RTD Data

Overload
Status

228

Modbus Register

Parameter Name

Min

Max

Default

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

40280

MAX WINDING RTD

-32768

32767

Get

380

40281

MAX BEARING RTD

-32768

32767

Get

381

40282

MAX AMBIENT RTD

-32768

32767

Get

382

40283

MAX OTHER RTD

-32768

32767

Get

383

40284

RTD1

-32768

32767

Get

384

40285

RTD2

-32768

32767

Get

385

40286

RTD3

-32768

32767

Get

386

40287

RTD4

-32768

32767

Get

387

40288

RTD5

-32768

32767

Get

388

40289

RTD6

-32768

32767

Get

389

40290

RTD7

-32768

32767

Get

390

40291

RTD8

-32768

32767

Get

391

40292

RTD9

-32768

32767

Get

392

40293

RTD10

-32768

32767

Get

393

40294

RTD11

-32768

32767

Get

394

40295

RTD12

-32768

32767

Get

395

40296

RTD % TCU

100

Get

396

40297

THERM CAP USED

9990

100

Get

397

40298

TIME TO TRIP

9999

Get

398

40299

STARTS AVAILABLE

255

Get

399

40300

TIME TO RESET

9999

Get

400

40301

Reserved

Write (0x06h)

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

Parameter List

Group

Motor
Statistics

Modbus Register

DeviceNet
Param No.

Read (0x03h)

401

Chapter B

Parameter Name

Min

Max

Default

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

40302

ELAPSED TIME-mm

59

Get

402

40303

ELAPSED TIME-hh

23

Get

403

40304

ELAPSED TIME-dd

65535

Get

404

40305

RUNNING TIME-mm

59

Get

405

40306

RUNNING TIME-hh

23

Get

406

40307

RUNNING TIME-dd

65535

Get

407

40308

STOPPED TIME-mm

59

Get

408

40309

STOPPED TIME-hh

23

Get

409

40310

STOPPED TIME-dd

65535

Get

410

40311

% TIME RUNNING

1000

10

Get

411

40312

STARTS COUNT

65535

Get

412

40313

EMER START COUNT

65535

Get

413

40314

LAST RST TIME-ss

5999

Get

414

40315

LAST RST TIME-mm

59

100

Get

415

40316

LAST RST TIME-hh

23

Get

416

40317

LAST RST DATE-dd

31

Get

417

40318

LAST RST DATE-mm

12

Get

418

40319

LAST RST DATE-yr

2000

9999

Get

Write (0x06h)

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

229

Chapter B

Parameter List

Group

DeviceNet
Param No.

Read (0x03h)

419

40320

420

40321

421

Modbus Register

Parameter Name

Min

Max

Default

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

NO. EVENT LOGS

Get

EVENT LOG SEL.

Get/Set

40322

EVENT TIME ss

5999

Get

422

40323

EVENT TIME mm

59

100

Get

423

40324

EVENT TIME hh

23

Get

424

40325

EVENT DAY dd

31

Get

425

40326

EVENT DAY mm

12

Get

426

40327

EVENT DAY yy

2000

9999

Get

427

40328

EVENT TYPE

Get

Get

Write (0x06h)

400321

0=No Trip
1=Overload Trip
2=Lockd Rotor Trip
3=Undercurr Trip
4=Jam Trip
5=Curr Imbal Trip
6=Short Ckt Trip
7=Ground Flt Trip
8=Speed Sw Trip
9=Undervolt Trip
10=Overvolt Trip

Historical
Data

11=Underpower Trip
12=Pwr Factor Trip
13=React Pwr Trip
14=Phase Rev Trip
15=Underfreq Trip
16=Overfreq Trip
17=RTD Trip
18=PTC Trip
19=Start Time Trip
20=MCM/CWE Fail
21=RTD Fail Trip
22=PTC Fail Trip
23=Reserved
24=Trigger
25=CommIdleLossTrip
26=Remote Trip
27=Comm Fail Trip
28=TestButton Trip
428

230

40329

EVENT L1

65535

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

Parameter List

Group

Historical
Data
(cont.)

Modbus Register

DeviceNet
Param No.

Read (0x03h)

429

Chapter B

Parameter Name

Min

Max

Default

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

40330

EVENT L2

65535

Get

430

40331

EVENT L3

65535

Get

431

40332

EVENT GF-RES

65535

Get

432

40333

EVENT GF-CB

65535

Get

433

40334

EVENT VAB/VAN

65535

Get

434

40335

EVENT VBC/VBN

65535

Get

435

40336

EVENT VCA/VCN

65535

Get

436

40337

EVENT DELTA/WYE

Get

Write (0x06h)

0=Delta
1=Wye

437

40338

RESERVED

438

40339

RESERVED

439

40340

RESERVED

440

40341

RESERVED

441

40342

RESERVED

442

40343

RESERVED

443

40344

RESERVED

444

40345

TRIP STATUS LO

Get

0=Overload
1=Undercurrent
2=Jam
3=Curr. Imbalance
4=Short Circuit
5=RTD-Wind Bear
6=PTC

Trip/Warn
Data

7=GF-Res
8=VAR
9=Underpower
10=Undervoltage
11=Overvoltage
12=Phase Reversal
13=Power Factor
14=Speed Switch
15=GF-CB

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

231

Chapter B

Parameter List

Group

DeviceNet
Param No.

Read (0x03h)

445

40346

Modbus Register
Write (0x06h)

Parameter Name
TRIP STATUS HI

Min

Max

0=Start Time

Default

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

Get

Get

1=Frequency 1
2=Frequency 2
3=RTD - Other
4=RTD - Ambient
5=PTC Error
6=RTD Error
7=MCM/CWE Error
8=Comm Idle
9=Comm Loss
10=Remote Trip
11=Comm Fault
12=Alarm Critical
13=Reserved
14=Reserved
Trip/Warn
Data
(cont.)

15=Reserved
446

40347

WARN STATUS LO

0=Overload Warn
1=Undercurr Warn
2=Jam Warn
3=Curr. Imbal Warn
4=Short Ckt Warn
5=RTD-W, B Warn
6=Reserved
7=GF-Res Warn
8=VAR Warn
9=Underpower Warn
10=Undervolt Warn
11=Overvolt Warn
12=Reserved
13=Pwr Factor Warn
14=Spd Switch Warn
15=GF-CB Warn

232

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

Parameter List

Group

Modbus Register

DeviceNet
Param No.

Read (0x03h)

447

40348

Write (0x06h)

Parameter Name
WARN STATUS HI

Min

Max

0=Reserved

Chapter B

Default

Scale
Factor

Units

Access

Get

1=Freq1 Warn
2=Freq2 Warn
3=RTD-Other Warn
4=RTD-Amb Warn
5=PTC Error Warn
6=RTD Error Warn
Trip/Warn
Data
(cont.)

7=MCM/CWE Err Warn


8=Comm Idle Warn
9=Comm Loss Warn
10=Reserved
11=Comm Fault Warn
12=Alarm Warn
13=Reserved
14=Reserved
15=Reserved

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

233

Chapter B

234

Parameter List

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

Appendix

Relay Word Bits

The protection and control element results are represented by Relay Status bits in
the 825-P relay. Each Relay Status bit has a label name and can be in either of the
following states:
1 (logical ON)
0 (logical OFF)

Overview

Logical ON represents an element being picked up or otherwise asserted. Logical


OFF represents an element being dropped out or otherwise de-asserted.
The Relay Word bits are collected into a table of 10 rows, each row containing 8
bits. The collection is called the Relay Word.
Table 112 shows a list of Relay Status bits and their descriptions. The Relay Word
bit row numbers correspond to the row numbers used in the TAR command in
MPS Explorer Software. For access from the front panel, use the following menu
path:
Main Menu > Targets

Table 113 shows additional Relay Word bits that are not available for output
mapping or for the display using the TARGET command. These bits are used
in the relay Sequential Events Recorder (SER) records. (Chapter 8: Analyzing
Events).

Definitions
Table 112 - Relay Word Bit Definitions for the 825-P (Sheet 1 of 4)
Row #

Bit

ENABLE

Definition
7

front panel ENABLE LED.

TRIP

front panel TRIP LED (see Chapter 3: Front Panel Operation)

Reserved for future use.

Reserved for future use.

Reserved for future use.

Reserved for future use.

Reserved for future use.

Reserved for future use.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

235

Chapter C

Relay Word Bits

Table 112 - Relay Word Bit Definitions for the 825-P (Sheet 2 of 4)
Row #

Bit

49T

Thermal (Overload) Trip. Assert when the relay issues a thermal element trip because of locked rotor starting or running overload conditions.

LOSSTRIP

Load-Loss Trip. Assert when the relay detects a load-loss as defined by that function and its settings.

JAMTRIP

Load-Jam Trip.

46UBT

Phase Current Unbalance Trip. Assert when the relay issues a trip in response to a current unbalance condition, as defined by that function and
its settings.

50P1T

Definite-Time Phase Overcurrent (Short Circuit Trip Level.

RTDT

Winding and Bearing RTD Overtemperature Trip.

PTCTRIP

Asserts when measured PTC loop resistance is greater than trip value.

50G1T

Definite-Time Residual Overcurrent (Trip Level.

VART

Reactive Power Trip. Assert when the relay issues a reactive power element trip.

37PT

Underpower Trip. Assert when the relay issues an underpower element trip.

27P1T

Phase Undervoltage Trip Definite time delayed.

59P1T

Phase Overvoltage Trip Definite time delayed).

47T

Phase Reversal Trip. Asserts when the relay detects a phase reversal condition.

55T

Power Factor Trip. Assert when the relay issues a power factor element alarm or trip.

SPDSTR

Speed Switch Trip. Asserts when the relay does not detect a speed switch contact closure within a settable trip period from the beginning of a
motor start.

50N1T

Definite-Time Neutral (Core Balance) Overcurrent.

SMTRIP

Asserts when Start Motor Timer times out.

81D1T

Definite-Time Over- and Underfrequency Element (Trip Level 1). Assert when the frequency has been either above or below the element set
point for a definite time.

81D2T

Definite-Time Over- and Underfrequency Element (Trip Level 2). Assert when the frequency has been either above or below the element set
point for a definite time.

OTHTRIP

Other Temperature Trip. Asserts when one or more healthy Other RTD temperature exceeds the trip set points.

AMBTRIP

Ambient Temperature Trip. Asserts when the healthy ambient RTD temperature exceeds its trip set point.

PTCFLT

Indicates faulted/shorted thermistor.

RTDFLT

Asserts when an open or short circuit condition is detected on any enabled RTD input, or communication with the external RTD module has
been interrupted.

MCMFLT

Asserts when the MCM module detected does not agree with the relay part number.

COMMIDLE

DeviceNet Card in programming mode.

COMMLOSS

DeviceNet communication fail.

REMTRIP

Remote Trip Control Input Asserted.

COMMFLT

Internal communication time-out.

Reserved for future use.

Reserved for future use.

Reserved for future use.

Reserved for future use.

49A

Thermal (Overload) Alarm. Assert when the relay issues a thermal element alarm/warning because of locked rotor starting or running
overload conditions.

LOSSALRM

Load-Loss Alarm/Warning. Assert when the relay detects a load-loss as defined by that function and its settings.

JAMALRM

Load-Jam Alarm/Warning.

236

Definition

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

Relay Word Bits

Chapter C

Table 112 - Relay Word Bit Definitions for the 825-P (Sheet 3 of 4)
Row #

Bit

Definition

46UBA

Phase Current Unbalance Alarm. Assert when the relay issues an alarm/warning in response to a current unbalance condition, as defined by
that function and its settings.

RTDA

Winding/Bearing RTD Overtemperature Alarm/Warning.

55A

Power Factor Alarm. Assert when the relay issues a power factor element alarm/warning.

50N2T

Definite-Time Neutral (Core Balance) Overcurrent (Warning Level.

50G2T

Definite-Time Residual Overcurrent (Warning Level.

VARA

Reactive Power Alarm. Assert when the relay issues a reactive power element alarm/warning.

37PA

Underpower Alarm. Assert when the relay issues an underpower element alarm/warning.

27P2T

Phase Undervoltage Alarm/Warning Definite time delayed.

59P2T

Phase Overvoltage Alarm/Warning Definite time delayed.

SPDSAL

Speed Switch Alarm. Asserts when the relay does not detect a speed switch contact closure within a settable warning period from the
beginning of a motor start.

81D1A

Definite-Time Over- and Underfrequency Element (Warning Level 1). Assert when the frequency has been either above or below the element
set point for a definite time.

81D2A

Definite-Time Over- and Underfrequency Element (Warning Level 2). Assert when the frequency has been either above or below the element
set point for a definite time.

OTHALRM

Other Temperature Alarm. Asserts when any healthy Other RTD temperature exceeds its alarm/warning set point.

AMBALRM

Ambient Temperature Alarm. Asserts if the healthy ambient RTD temperature exceeds its alarm/warning set point.

SALARM

Pulses for the following conditions: Setting Changes, Access Level Changes, and three unsuccessful password entry attempts.

WARNING

Asserts when any of the protection elements (warning level) operates or when the relay detects self-test failure (see Table89), RTD/PTC faults,
or DeviceNet communications alarms.

LOADUP

Asserts when the selected load parameter exceeds an upper level setting (see Table34).

LOADLOW

Asserts when the selected load parameter drops below a lower level setting (see Table34).

TIMER1T

Output of the Timer Function logic (see Table39).

TIMER2T

50P2T

Definite-Time Phase Overcurrent (Short Circuit Warning Level).

STOPPED

Asserts when the motor is stopped.

RUNNING

Asserts when the motor is running.

STARTING

Asserts when the protected motor is starting.

STAR

Asserts when the Star-Delta Starting function issues a command to switch motor configuration to Star (see Star-Delta Starting on page 2-28).

DELTA

Asserts when the Star-Delta Starting function issues a command to switch motor configuration to Delta (see Star-Delta Starting on page 2-28).

START

Output of the motor start logic.

Reserved for future use.

Reserved for future use.

IN1

Control inputs IN1IN5 (inputs IN3IN5 are optional).

IN2

IN3

IN4

IN5

Reserved for future use.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

237

Chapter C

Relay Word Bits

Table 112 - Relay Word Bit Definitions for the 825-P (Sheet 4 of 4)
Row #

10

Bit

Definition

Reserved for future use.

Reserved for future use.

TRIP

Output of Trip Logic.

AUX1

Output of AUX1AUX6 mapping (outputs AUX3AUX6 are optional).

AUX2

AUX3

AUX4

AUX5

AUX6

Reserved for future use.

Table 113 - Additional 825-P Relay Status Bits for SER Command
Bit Name

Definition

THERMLO

Motor Lockout Conditions. Asserted by the thermal element (THERMLO).

NOSLO

Starts per hour function (NOSLO).

TBSLO

Minimum time between starts (TBSLO).

ABSLO

Anti-backspin timer (ABSLO).

SPEED2

Asserts when control input mapped to SPEED2 asserts.

238

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

Appendix

ASCII Port Relay Command Summary

ASCII Port Relay

The ASCII Port Relay Command Summary table below lists the front serial port
ASCII commands associated with particular activities. The commands are shown
in upper-case letters, but they can also be entered with lower-case letters.

Serial Port Command

Access Level

Command Description

2AC

1, 2

Go to Access Level 2.

ACC

0, 2

Go to Access Level 1.

ANA

Test analog output (refer to Chapter 12: ASCII Serial Communications for details).

DAT

1, 2

View date.

DAT mm/dd/yyyy

1, 2

Enter date in MDY format if DATE_F setting is MDY.

DAT dd/mm/yyyy

1, 2

Enter date in DMY format if DATE-F setting is DMY.

DAT yyyy/mm/dd

1, 2

Enter date in YMD format if DATE-F setting is YMD.

MET

1, 2

Display instantaneous metering data.

MET k

1, 2

Display instantaneous metering data k times, where k is 132767.

MET T

1, 2

Display thermal and RTD metering data.

MOT

1, 2

Display motor operating statistics report.

MOT R or C

Reset motor operating statistics.

PAS

Show existing Access Level 1 and Level 2 passwords.

PAS 1 xxxxxxxx

Change Access Level 1 password to xxxxxxxx

PAS 2 xxxxxxxx

Change Access Level 2 password to xxxxxxxx

QUI

1, 2

Go to Access Level 0.

SER

1, 2

Display all Sequential Events Recorder (SER) data.

SER n

1, 2

Display the n most recent SER records starting with record n.

SER n1 n2

1, 2

Display SER records n2n1, starting with n2.

SER d1

1, 2

Display all SER records made on date d1.

SER d1 d2

1, 2

Display all SER records made from dates d2d1, inclusive, starting with d2.

SER R or C

1, 2

Reset SER data.

SET

Enter/change relay settings.

SET P

Enter/change Serial Port F settings.

SET M

Enter/change I/O mapping settings.

SET name

For all SET commands, jump ahead to a specific setting by entering setting name, e.g., 50P1P.

SET TERSE

For all SET commands, TERSE disables the automatic SHO command after settings entry.

SHO

1, 2

Show relay settings.

SHO A

1, 2

Show all relay settings: enabled and disabled/hidden.

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

239

Chapter D

240

ASCII Port Relay Command Summary

Serial Port Command

Access Level

Command Description

SHO P

1, 2

Show Serial Port F settings.

SHO M

1, 2

Show I/O mapping settings.

STA

1, 2

Display relay self-test status.

STA R or C

Clear self-test status and restart relay.

STO

Stop motor.

STR

Start motor.

SUM

1, 2

View event summary reports.

SUM R or C

1, 2

Reset event summary buffer.

TAR

1, 2

Display Relay Word Row 0 (front panel target LEDs).

TAR n k

1, 2

Display Relay Word Row n (n = 010). Repeat k times.

TAR name k

1, 2

Display Relay Word Row containing Relay Word name. Repeat k times.

TAR R

Reset front panel trip/target LEDs.

TIM

1, 2

View time.

TIM hh:mm:ss

1, 2

Set time by entering TIM followed by hours, minutes, and seconds, as shown (24-hour clock).

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

Appendix

DeviceNet Information

Section

Page

Electronic Data Sheets

242

Product Codes

242

DeviceNet Objects

242

Identity Objects - CLASS CODE 0x0001

243

Message Router - CLASS CODE 0x0002

244

DeviceNet Object - CLASS CODE 0x0003

244

Assembly Object - CLASS CODE 0x0004

245

Custom Parameter-Based Input (Produced) Assembly Instance 100

246

Standard Input (Produced) Assemblies

247

Standard Output (Consumed) Assemblies

250

Connection Object - CLASS CODE 0x0005

251

Discrete Input Point Object - CLASS CODE 0x0008

254

Discrete Output Point Object - CLASS CODE 0x0009

255

Discrete Output Point Object Special Requirements

256

State Transition Diagram

256

Parameter Object - CLASS CODE 0x000F

257

Parameter Group Object - CLASS CODE 0x0010

258

Discrete Output Group Object - CLASS CODE 0x001E

259

Control Supervisor Object - CLASS CODE 0x0029

261

Acknowledge Handler Object - CLASS CODE 0x002b

261

Overload Object - CLASS CODE 0x002c

262

DeviceNet Interface Object - CLASS CODE 0x00B4

262

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - November 2012

241

Chapter E

DeviceNet Information

Electronic Data Sheets

Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) files are specially formatted ASCII files that provide
all of the information necessary for a configuration tool (e.g., RSNetWorx for
DeviceNet) to access and alter the parameters of a device. The EDS file contains
all the parameter information of a device: number of parameters, groupings,
parameter name, min, max, and default values, units, data format and scaling.
EDS files are available from the Internet at www.ab.com/networks/eds/index/
html. They can also be built automatically by some configuration tools since all of
the information necessary for an EDS file can be extracted from the 825-P
Modular Protection System.

Product Codes

Configuration tools use product codes to identify which EDS file to use for a
given device. The 825-P Modular Protection System has a product code of
100(64 hex).

DeviceNet Objects

The 825-P Modular Protection System supports the following DeviceNet object
classes:
Table 114 - DeviceNet Object Classes

242

Class

Object

0x0001

Identity

0x0002

Message Router

0x0003

DeviceNet

0x0004

Assembly

0x0005

Connection

0x0008

Discrete Input Point

0x0009

Discrete Output Point

0x000F

Parameter Object

0x0010

Parameter Group Object

0x001E

Discrete Output Group

0x0029

Control Supervisor

0x002B

Acknowledge Handler

0x002C

Overload Object

0x00B4

DN Interface Object

0x00C2

PCP Object

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

DeviceNet Information

Chapter E

The following class attributes are supported for the Identity Object:

Identity Object - CLASS


CODE 0x0001
Attribute ID

Access Rule

Get

Name
Revision

Data Type
UINT

Value
1

The table below shows Instance 1 attributes of the Identity Object. Each instance
of the Identity Object contains the following attributes:

Attribute ID

Access Rule

Get

Vendor

UINT

Get

Device Type

UINT

Get

Produce Code

UINT

100 (64 hex)

Get

Revision
Major Revision
Minor Revision

Structure of
UINT
UINT

0RRRMMMM
0 = reserved by
DeviceNet
RRR = Revision of Motor
Relay
MMMM = Revision of
DNet card

Get

Status

WORD

Bit 0 - 0=not owned;


1=owned by master
Bit 2 - 0=Factory
Defaulted; 1=Configured
Bit 8 - Minor
Recoverable fault
Bit 9 - Minor
Unrecoverable fault
Bit 10 - Major
Recoverable fault
Bit 11 - Major
Unrecoverable fault

Get

Serial Number

UDINT

Unique number for each


device

7*

Get

Produce Name
String Name
ASCII String

Structure of
USINT
STRING

825-P

Configuration
Consistency Value

UINT

Get

Name

Data Type

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

Value

Unique value depending


on output of the
parameter checksum
algorithm.

243

Chapter E

DeviceNet Information

The following common services are implemented for the Identity Object:

Implemented for:

Service Code

Service Name

Class

Instance

0x0E

No

Yes

Get_Attribute_Single

0x05

No

Yes

Reset

Message Router - CLASS


CODE 0x0002

No class or instance attributes are supported. The message router object exists
only to rout explicit messages to other objects.

DeviceNet Object - CLASS


CODE 0x0003

The following class attributes are supported for the DeviceNet Object:

Attribute ID

Access Rule

Name

Data Type

Value

Get

Revision

UINT

Only Instance 1 of the DeviceNet Object is supported. The following instance


attributes are supported:

Attribute ID

Access Rule

Get/Set

Node Address

USINT

0-63

Get/Set

Baud Rate

USINT

0=125K
1=250K
2=500K

Get

Allocation Info
Allocation Choice
Master Node Addr

Structure of
BYTE
USINT

MAC ID Switch Value

USINT

Get

Name

Data Type

Value

Allocation_byte**
0-63 = address
255 = unallocated
0-63

**Allocation_byte Bit 0 Explicit messaging

Bit 1 Polled I/O


Bit 4 COS I/O
Bit 5 Cyclic I/O
Bit 6 Acknowledge Suppression
The following services are implemented for the DeviceNet Object:

244

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

DeviceNet Information

Implemented for:

Service Code

Chapter E

Service Name

Class

Instance

0x0E

Yes

Yes

Get_Attribute_Single

0x10

No

Yes

Set_Attribute_Single

0x4E

No

Yes

Allocate_Master/Slave _Connection_Set

0x4C

No

Yes

Release_Master/Slave _Connection_Set

The following class attributes are supported for the Assembly Object:

Assembly Object - CLASS


CODE 0x0004
Attribute ID

Access Rule

Name

Data Type

Value

Get

Max Instance

UINT

189

All of the various instances of the assembly object supports attribute 3, Data.
Details about the specific content of the data attribute for each of the instances is
described after the following summary Assembly Object Instance table:

Instance

Type

Description

Consumed

Required ODVA Consumed Instance

50

Produced

Required ODVA Produced Instance

51

Produced

ODVA Starter

100

Produced

Custom Parameter Based Word Wise Assembly

101

Produced

825 Average Current Overload

102

Produced

825 Phase Current Overload

103

Produced

825 Current Overload

104

Produced

825 Misc. Information Overload

150

Consumed

Standard Overload

151

Consumed

Standard Overload with Network Inputs

180

Produced

Auxiliary Inputs

181

Consumed

Auxiliary Outputs

182

Consumed

Consumed Network Bits 1 (also known as Network Inputs)

183

Consumed

Consumed Network Bits 2 (also known as Network Inputs)

184

Produced

Produced Network Bits (also known as Network Outputs)

185

Produced

Trip Status 1

186

Produced

Trip Status 2

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

245

Chapter E

DeviceNet Information

Custom Parameter Based


Input (Produced) Assembly
Instance 100

Instance

Type

Description

187

Produced

Warn Status 1

188

Produced

Warn Status 2

189

Produced

Module Status Bits

Instance 100
Word

Byte

Value of the parameter pointed to by Produced Word 0 Param (low byte)

Value of the parameter pointed to by Produced Word 0 Param (high byte)

Value of the parameter pointed to by Produced Word 1 Param (low byte)

Value of the parameter pointed to by Produced Word 1 Param (high byte)

Value of the parameter pointed to by Produced Word 2 Param (low byte)

Value of the parameter pointed to by Produced Word 2 Param (high byte)

Value of the parameter pointed to by Produced Word 3 Param (low byte)

Value of the parameter pointed to by Produced Word 3 Param (high byte)

Value of the parameter pointed to by Produced Word 4 Param (low byte)

Value of the parameter pointed to by Produced Word 4 Param (high byte)

10

Value of the parameter pointed to by Produced Word 5 Param (low byte)

11

Value of the parameter pointed to by Produced Word 5 Param (high byte)

12

Value of the parameter pointed to by Produced Word 6 Param (low byte)

13

Value of the parameter pointed to by Produced Word 6 Param (high byte)

14

Value of the parameter pointed to by Produced Word 7 Param (low byte)

15

Value of the parameter pointed to by Produced Word 7 Param (high byte)

246

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

DeviceNet Information

Standard Input (Produced)


Assemblies

Chapter E

Instance 50 is the required input (produced) assembly defined in the DeviceNet


Motor Overload Profile.

Instance 50 ODVA Overload


Byte

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0
Fault

Instance 51 is the required input (produced) assembly defined in the DeviceNet


Motor Starter Profile.

Instance 51 ODVA Starter


Byte

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Warning

Fault

Instance 101 is the 825 Average Current Overload Input (produced) assembly.

Instance 101 825 Average Current Overload


Byte

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

0
1

Reserved

Average 3 Phase Current (low)

Average 3 Phase Current (high)

Bit 1

Bit 0

Warning

Tripped

Instance 102 is the 825 Phase Current Input (produced) assembly.

Instance 102 825 Phase Current


Byte

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

0
1

Reserved

Current Phase L1 (low)

Current Phase L1 (high)

Current Phase L2 (low)

Current Phase L2 (high)

Current Phase L3 (low)

Current Phase L3 (high)

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Warning

Tripped

247

Chapter E

DeviceNet Information

Instance 103 is the 825 Current Input (produced) assembly.

Instance 103 825 Current


Byte

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

0
1

% Thermal Capacity Used

Average 3 Phase Current (low)

Average 3 Phase Current (high)

% Asymmetry

Bit 1

Bit 0

Warning

Tripped

Bit 1

Bit 0

Warning

Tripped

Instance 104 is the 825 Misc. Input (produced) assembly.

Instance 104 825 Phase Current


Byte

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

0
1

% Thermal Capacity Used

Average 3 Phase Current (low)

Average 3 Phase Current (high)

% Asymmetry

Max value of all Temperature sensors

Earth Current (low)

Earth Current (high)

This is a Read Only status assembly.

Instance 180 Hardware Inputs 1-6


Byte

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Input 8

Input 7

Input 6

Input 5

Input 4

Input 3

Input 2

Input 1

This is a Read Only status assembly.

Instance 184 Produced Network Outputs 1-15

248

Byte

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Net Out 8

Net Out 7

Net Out 6

Net Out 5

Net Out 4

Net Out 3

Net Out 2

Net Out 1

Net Out 16

Net Out 15

Net Out 14

Net Out 13

Net Out 12

Net Out 11

Net Out 10

Net Out 9

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

DeviceNet Information

Chapter E

This is a Read Only status assembly.

Instance 185 Trip Status 1


Byte

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

GF Res

PTC

RTD Wind

Short Ckt

Cur Imbal

Jam

Undercurrent

Overload

GF CB

Sp Switch

P Factor

Ph Rev

Over V

Under V

Under power

VAR

This is a Read Only status assembly.

Instance 186 Trip Status 2


Byte

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

MCM err

RTD err

PTC err

RTD Amb

RTD other

Freq 2

Freq 1

Stall

Remote

Comm Idle

Comm Loss

This is a Read Only status assembly.

Instance 187 Warning Status 1


Byte

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

GF Res

PTC

RTD Wind

Short Ckt

Cur Imbal

Jam

Undercurrent

Overload

GF CB

Sp Switch

P Factor

Ph Rev

Over V

Under V

Under power

VAR

This is a Read Only status assembly.

Instance 188 Warning Status 2


Byte

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

MCM err

RTD err

PTC err

RTD Amb

RTD other

Freq 2

Freq 1

Stall

Remote

Comm Idle

Comm Loss

This is a Read Only status assembly.

Instance 189 Module Status


Byte
0

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

I/O Idle

I/O Flt

Exp Flt

I/O Cnxn

Exp Cnxn

Warning

Trip

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

249

Chapter E

DeviceNet Information

Instance 2 is the required output (consumed) assembly defined in the Motor


Overload Profile.

Standard Output
(Consumed) Assemblies

Instance 3 ODVA Overload


Byte

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Flt Reset

Instance 150 is the standard output (consumed) assembly with Network Inputs.

Instance 150 Standard Consumed Starter


Byte

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Aux 8

Aux 7

Aux 6

Aux 5

Aux 4

Aux 3

Aux 2

Aux 1

Flt Reset

Aux 10

Aux 9

Instance 151 is the standard output (consumed) assembly with Network Inputs.

Instance 151 Standard Consumed Starter with Network Inputs


Byte

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Aux 8

Aux 7

Aux 6

Aux 5

Aux 4

Aux 3

Aux 2

Aux 1

Flt Reset

Aux 10

Aux 9

Net In 8

Net In 7

Net In 6

Net In 5

Net In 4

Net In 3

Net In 2

Net In 1

Net In 16

Net In 15

Net In 14

Net In 13

Net In 12

Net In 11

Net In 10

Net In 9

Net In 24

Net In 23

Net In 22

Net In 21

Net In 20

Net In 19

Net In 18

Net In 17

Net In 32

Net In 31

Net In 30

Net In 29

Net In 28

Net In 27

Net In 26

Net In 25

This is a Read/Write control assembly.

Instance 181 Hardware Outputs 1-6

250

Byte

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Aux 8

Aux 7

Aux 6

Aux 5

Aux 4

Aux 3

Aux 2

Aux 1

Flt Reset

Aux 10

Aux 9

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

DeviceNet Information

Chapter E

This is a Read/Write control assembly.

Instance 182 Consumed Network Inputs 1-16


Byte

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Net Input 8

Net Input 7

Net Input 6

Net Input 5

Net Input 4

Net Input 3

Net Input 2

Net Input 1

Net Input 16

Net Input 15

Net Input 14

Net Input 13

Net Input 12

Net Input 11

Net Input 10

Net Input 9

This is a Read/Write control assembly.

Instance 183 Consumed Network Inputs 17-32


Byte

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 5

Bit 4

Bit 3

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Net Input 24

Net Input 23

Net Input 22

Net Input 21

Net Input 20

Net Input 19

Net Input 18

Net Input 17

Net Input 32

Net Input 31

Net Input 30

Net Input 29

Net Input 28

Net Input 27

Net Input 26

Net Input 25

Connection Object - CLASS


CODE 0x0005

No class attributes are supported for the Connection Object. Multiple instances
of the Connection Object are supported, Instances 1, 2 and 4 from the group 2
predefined master/slave connection set, and Instances 57 are available explicit
UCMM connections.
Instance 1 is the Predefined Group 2 Connection Set Explicit Message
Connection. The following Instance 1 attributes are supported:

Attribute ID

Access Rule

Name

Data Type

Get

State

USINT

0 = nonexistant
1 = configuring
3 = established
4 = timed out

Get

Instance Type

USINT

0 = Explicit Message

Get

Transport Class Trigger

USINT

0x83 - Server, Transport Class 3

Get

Produced Connection ID

UINT

10xxxxxx011
xxxxxx = node address

Get

Consumed Connection ID

UINT

10xxxxxx100
xxxxxx = node address

Get

Initial Comm Characteristics

USINT

0x22

Get

Produced Connection Size

UINT

0x61

Get

Consumed Connection Size

UINT

0x61

Get/Set

Expected Packet Rate

UINT

in milliseconds

12

Get

Watchdog Action

USINT

01 = auto delete
03 = deferred delete

13

Get

Produced Connection Path Length

UINT

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

Value

251

Chapter E

DeviceNet Information

Attribute ID

Access Rule

Name

14

Get

Produced Connection Path

15

Get

Consumed Connection Path Length

16

Get

Consumed Connection Path

Data Type

Value
Empty

UINT

0
Empty

Instance 2 is the Predefined Group 2 Connection Set Polled IO Message


Connection. The following Instance 2 attributes are supported:

252

Attribute ID

Access Rule

Name

Data Type

Get

State

USINT

0 = nonexistant
1 = configuring
3 = established
4 = timed out

Get

Instance Type

USINT

1 = I/O Connection

Get

Transport Class Trigger

USINT

0x82 - Server, Transport Class 2


(If alloc_choice ! = polled and
ack suppression is enabled then
value = 0x80)

Get

Produced Connection ID

UINT

01111xxxxxx
xxxxxx = node address

Get

Consumed Connection ID

UINT

10xxxxxx101
xxxxxx = node address

Get

Initial Comm Characteristics

USINT

0x21

Get

Produced Connection Size

UINT

0 to 8

Get

Consumed Connection Size

UINT

0 to 8

Get/Set

Expected Packet Rate

UINT

in milliseconds

12

Get/Set

Watchdog Action

USINT

0 = transition to timed out


1 = auto delete
2 = auto reset

13

Get

Produced Connection Path Length

UINT

14

Get/Set

15

Get

16

Get/Set

Produced Connection Path


Consumed Connection Path Length

Value

21 04 00 25 (assy inst #) 00 30
03
UINT

Consumed Connection Path

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

8
21 04 00 25 (assy inst #) 00 30
03

DeviceNet Information

Chapter E

Instance 4 is the Predefined Group 2 Connection Set Change of State/Cyclic IO


Message Connection. The following Instance 4 attributes are supported:

Attribute ID

Access Rule

Name

Data Type

Value

Get

State

USINT

0 = nonexistant
1 = configuring
3 = established
4 = timed out

Get

Instance Type

USINT

1 = I/O Connection

Get

Transport Class Trigger

USINT

0x00 (Cyclic, unacknowledged)


0x03 (Cyclic, acknowledged)
0x10 (COS, unacknowledged)
0x13 (COS, acknowledged)

Get

Produced Connection ID

UINT

01101xxxxxx
xxxxxx = node address

Get

Consumed Connection ID

UINT

10xxxxxx101
xxxxxx = node address

Get

Initial Comm Characteristics

USINT

0x02 (acknowledged)
0x0F (unacknowledged)

Get

Produced Connection Size

UINT

0 to 8

Get

Consumed Connection Size

UINT

0 to 8

Get/Set

Expected Packet Rate

UINT

in milliseconds

12

Get

Watchdog Action

USINT

0 = transition to timed out


1 = auto delete
2 = auto reset

13

Get

Produced Connection Path Length

UINT

14

Get

Produced Connection Path

15

Get

Consumed Connection Path Length

16

Get/Set

21 04 00 25 (assy inst #) 00 30
03
UINT

Consumed Connection Path

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

8
21 04 00 25 (assy inst #) 00 30
03

253

Chapter E

DeviceNet Information

Instances 57 are available group 3 explicit message connections that are


allocated through the UCMM. The following attributes are supported:

Attribute ID

Access Rule

Name

Data Type

Value

Get

State

USINT

0 = nonexistant
1 = configuring
3 = established
4 = timed out

Get

Instance Type

USINT

0 = Explicit Message

Get

Transport Class Trigger

USINT

0x83 - Server, Transport Class 3

Get

Produced Connection ID

UINT

Depends on message group


and Message ID

Get

Consumed Connection ID

UINT

Depends on message group


and Message ID

Get

Initial Comm Characteristics

USINT

0x33 (Group 3)

Get

Produced Connection Size

UINT

Get

Consumed Connection Size

UINT

Get/Set

Expected Packet Rate

UINT

in milliseconds

12

Get

Watchdog Action

USINT

01 = auto delete
03 = deferred delete

13

Get

Produced Connection Path Length

UINT

14

Get

Produced Connection Path

15

Get

Consumed Connection Path Length

16

Get

Consumed Connection Path

Empty
UINT

0
Empty

The following services are implemented for the Connection Object:

Implemented for:

Service Code

Instance

0x05

No

Yes

Reset

0x0E

No

Yes

Get_Attribute_Single

0x10

No

Yes

Set_Attribute_Single

The following class attributes are supported for the Discrete Input Point Object:

Discreet Input Point Object CLASS CODE 0x0008

254

Service Name

Class

Attribute ID

Access Rule

Name

Data Type

Value

Get

Revision

UINT

Get

Max Instance

UINT

2, 5, or 8

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

DeviceNet Information

Chapter E

Five Instances of the Discrete Input Point Object are supported. All instances
contains the following attributes:

Attribute ID

Access Rule

Name

Data Type

Value

Get

Value

BOOL

0 = OFF, 1 = ON

115

Get/Set

Force Enable

BOOL

0 = Disable, 1 = Enable

116

Get/Set

Force Value

BOOL

0 = OFF, 1 = ON

The following services are implemented for the Discrete Input Point Object:

Implemented for:

Service Code

Service Name

Class

Instance

0x0E

Yes

Yes

Get_Attribute_Single

0x10

No

Yes

Set_Attribute_Single

The following class attributes are supported for the Discrete Output Point
Object:

Discreet Output Point


Object - CLASS CODE 0x0009
Attribute ID

Access Rule

Name

Data Type

Value

Get

Revision

UINT

Get

Max Instance

UINT

2, 6, or 10

Six Instances of the Discrete Output Point Object are supported. All instances
contains the following attributes:

Attribute ID

Access Rule

Name

Data Type

Value

Get

Value

BOOL

0 = OFF, 1 = ON

115

Get/Set

Force Enable

BOOL

0 = Disable, 1 = Enable

116

Get/Set

Force Value

BOOL

0 = OFF, 1 = ON

117

Get/Set

Input Binding

STRUCT:
USINT
Array of USINT

Size of appendix I encoded path


Appendix I encoded path
NULL path means attribute 3
drives the output.
Otherwise, this is a path to a bit
in the Bit Table.

The following services are implemented for the Discrete Output Point Object:

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

255

Chapter E

DeviceNet Information

Implemented for:

Service Code

Service Name

Class

Instance

0x0E

Yes

Yes

Get_Attribute_Single

0x10

No

Yes

Set_Attribute_Single

There are many sources that can control an auxiliary relay output when assigned
for Network use: an I/O message, and explicit message, DeviceLogix programs,
network fault and idle conditions, and protection fault conditions. An output
point must know how to select which source of data to use to drive its value
attribute. Refer to the I/O Assignments section of Chapter 5 in the 825-P
Modular Protection System User Manual, publication 825-UM004, for
instructions on assignment of functions to the auxiliary output relays.

Discrete Output Point


Object Special
Requirements

An output that is not used in a DeviceLogix program follows the rules


described in the State Transition Diagram below.
Figure 63 - State Transition Diagram

Non-Existent
Power off

Power up

Available

Connection
Transitions to
Established

Protection Fault

Idle
Ready

DNet Fault

Connection Transitions to Established

DNet Fault
Protection
Fault

DNet Fault
DNet
Idle

Ready

Protection Fault Reset

Protection

Protection Fault
Receive
Data

Receive Idle

256

Run

Protection Fault
DNet Fault

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

DeviceNet Information

Chapter E

The following class attributes are supported for the Parameter Object:

Parameter Object - CLASS


CODE 0x000F
Attribute ID

Access Rule

Name

Data Type

Get

Revision

UINT

Get

Max Instance

UINT

Get

Parameter Class Descriptor

WORD

Get

Configuration Assembly Instance

UINT

Value

There is a standard set of instances reserved (1100) for 825-PDN


DeviceNet Communication Card specific parameters. These instances are
followed by the motor relay parameters.
Refer to AppendixB of the 825-P Modular Protection System User Manual
(publication 825-UM004) for details of the individual motor relay parameter
instances.
The following services are implemented for the Parameter Object:

Service Code

Implemented for:

Service Name

Class

Instance

0x0E

Yes

Yes

Get_Attribute_Single

0x10

No

Yes

Set_Attribute_Single

0x01

No

Yes

Get_Attributes_All

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

257

Chapter E

DeviceNet Information

The following instance attributes are implemented for all parameter attributes:

Attribute ID

Access Rule

Name

Data Type

Get/Set

Value

Get

Link Path Size

Get

Link Path

Array of:
BYTE
EPATH

Get

Descriptor

WORD

Get

Data Type

EPATH

Get

Data Size

USINT

Get

Parameter Name String

SHORT_STRING

Get

Units String

SHORT_STRING

Get

Help String

SHORT_STRING

10

Get

Minimum Value

Specified in Descriptor

11

Get

Maximum Value

Specified in Descriptor

12

Get

Default Value

Specified in Descriptor

13

Get

Scaling Multiplier

UINT

14

Get

Scaling Divisor

UINT

15

Get

Scaling Base

UINT

16

Get

Scaling Offset

INT

17

Get

Multiplier Link

UINT

18

Get

Divisor Link

UINT

19

Get

Base Link

UINT

20

Get

Offset Link

UINT

21

Get

Decimal Precision

USINT

Value

Specified in Descriptor
USINT

The following class attributes are supported for the Parameter Object:

Parameter Object - CLASS


CODE 0x0010
Attribute ID

Access Rule

Name

Data Type

Get

Revision

UINT

Get

Max Instance

UINT

Value

The 825-PDN DeviceNet Communication Card serves modules serves up the


following instances of the parameter group object:
Instance 1 = Status Parameters
Instance 2 = DeviceNet Parameters
Instance 3 = User I/O Parameters
258

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

DeviceNet Information

Chapter E

Instance 4 = Misc.
Instance 5 = DeviceLogix Parameters
Instance 6-n = Motor Relay specific parameter groups
The following instance attributes are supported for all parameter group instances:

Attribute ID

Access Rule

Name

Data Type

Get

Group Name String

SHORT_STRING

Get

Number of Members

UINT

3
4
n

Get

1st

Parameter

UINT

Get

2nd Parameter

UINT

Get

Nth Parameter

UINT

Value

The following common services are implemented for the Parameter Group
Object:

Implemented for:

Service Code
0x0E

Discrete Output Group


Object - CLASS CODE
0x001E

Class

Instance

Yes

Yes

Service Name
Get_Attribute_Single

No class attributes are supported for the Discrete Output Group Object.
Supported instances of the Discrete Output Group Object are listed below.
Instance 1 contains the following attributes:

Attribute ID

Access Rule

Name

Get

Number of
Instances

Get

Binding

Get/Set

104
105

Data Type
USINT

Value
10

Array of UINT

List of DOP instances

Command

BOOL

0 = idle and 1 = run

Get/Set

Network Status
Override

BOOL

0 = No Override (go to safe state)


1 = Override (run local logic)

Get/Set

Comm Status
Override

BOOL

0 = No Override (go to safe state)


1 = Override (run local logic)

Instance 2 contains the following attributes:

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

259

Chapter E

DeviceNet Information

Attribute ID

Access Rule

Name

Data Type

Value

Get

Number of
Instances

Get

Binding

Get/Set

Fault Action

BOOL

0=Fault Value attribute, 1=Hold Last State

Get/Set

Fault Value

BOOL

0=OFF, 1=ON

Get/Set

Idle Action

BOOL

0=Fault Value attribute, 1=Hold Last State

10

Get/Set

Idle Value

BOOL

0=OFF, 1=ON

113

Get/Set

Pr Fault Action

BOOL

0=Fault Value attribute, 1=Hold Last State

114

Get/Set

Pr Fault Value

BOOL

0=OFF, 1=ON

USINT

10

Array of UINT

1, 2

Instance 3 contains the following attributes:

Attribute ID

Access Rule

Name

Data Type

Get

Number of
Instances

Get

Binding

Get/Set

Fault Action

BOOL

0=Fault Value attribute, 1=Hold Last State

Get/Set

Fault Value

BOOL

0=OFF, 1=ON

Get/Set

Idle Action

BOOL

0=Fault Value attribute, 1=Hold Last State

10

Get/Set

Idle Value

BOOL

0=OFF, 1=ON

113

Get/Set

Pr Fault Action

BOOL

0=Fault Value attribute, 1=Hold Last State

114

Get/Set

Pr Fault Value

BOOL

0=OFF, 1=ON

USINT
Array of UINT

Value
4
3, 4, 5, 6

Instance 4 contains the following attributes:

Attribute ID

Access Rule

Name

Data Type

Get

Number of
Instances

Get

Binding

Get/Set

Fault Action

BOOL

0=Fault Value attribute, 1=Hold Last State

Get/Set

Fault Value

BOOL

0=OFF, 1=ON

Get/Set

Idle Action

BOOL

0=Fault Value attribute, 1=Hold Last State

10

Get/Set

Idle Value

BOOL

0=OFF, 1=ON

113

Get/Set

Pr Fault Action

BOOL

0=Fault Value attribute, 1=Hold Last State

114

Get/Set

Pr Fault Value

BOOL

0=OFF, 1=ON

USINT
Array of UINT

Value
4
7, 8, 9, 10

The following common services are implemented for the Discrete Input Group
Object:

260

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

DeviceNet Information

Implemented for:

Service Code

Service Name

Class

Instance

0x0E

No

Yes

Get_Attribute_Single

0x10

No

Yes

Set_Attribute_Single

Control Supervisor Object CLASS CODE 0x0029

Chapter E

No class attributes are supported.


Only Instance 1 of the Control Supervisor Object is supported. The following
instance attributes are supported:

Attribute ID

Access Rule

Name

Data Type

10

Get

Tripped

BOOL

11

Get

Warning

BOOL

12

Get/Set

Fault Reset

BOOL

Value

0->1 = Trip Reset

The following common services are implemented for the Control Supervisor
Object:

Implemented for:

Service Code

Service Name

Class

Instance

0x0E

No

Yes

Get_Attribute_Single

0x10

No

Yes

Set_Attribute_Single

Acknowledge Handler
Object - CLASS CODE
0x002b
Attribute ID

Access Rule

Get/Set

2
3

No class attributes are supported for the Acknowledge Handler Object.


Only Instance 1 of the Acknowledge Handler Object is supported. The
following instance attributes are supported:

Name

Data Type

Value

Acknowledge Timer

UINT

milliseconds

Get

Retry Limit

USINT

Get

COS Producing Connection Instance

UINT

The following common services are implemented for the Acknowledge Handler
Object:

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

261

Chapter E

DeviceNet Information

Implemented for:

Service Code

Service Name

Class

Instance

0x0E

No

Yes

Get_Attribute_Single

0x10

No

Yes

Set_Attribute_Single

Overload Object - CLASS


CODE 0x002c

No class attributes are supported for the Overload Object. Only Instance 1 of
the Overload Object is supported.

Attribute ID

Access Rule

Name

Data Type

Value

Get

Average Current

UINT

xxx.x amps

Get

%Phase Imbal

USINT

xxx% FLA

Get

% Thermal Utilized

USINT

xxx% FLA

Get

Current L1

UINT

xxx.x amps

Get

Current L2

UINT

xxx.x amps

10

Get

Current L3

UINT

xxx.x amps

11

Get

Ground Current

UINT

xxx.x amps

The following common services are implemented for the Overload Object:

Implemented for:

Service Code

Service Name

Class

Instance

0x0E

No

Yes

Get_Attribute_Single

0x10

No

No

Set_Attribute_Single

DeviceNet Interface Object


- CLASS CODE 0x00B4

The following class attributes are supported for the DeviceNet Interface Object:

Attribute ID

Access Rule

Name

Data Type

Value

Get

Revision

UINT

02

Only Instance 1 of the DeviceNet Interface Object is supported:

262

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

DeviceNet Information

Attribute ID

Access
Rule

Name

Data
Type

Min/Max

Default

Get/Set

Prod Assy Word 0

UINT

Defines Word 0 of Assy 100

Get/Set

Prod Assy Word 1

UINT

Defines Word 1 of Assy 100

Get/Set

Prod Assy Word 2

UINT

Defines Word 2 of Assy 100

10

Get/Set

Prod Assy Word 3

UINT

Defines Word 3 of Assy 100

15

Get/Set

Autobaud Enable

BOOL

01

1= enabled; 0 = disabled

16

Get/Set

Consumed Assy

USINT

0185

150

17

Get/Set

Produced Assy

USINT

0185

103

19

Get/Set

Set To Defaults

BOOL

01

23

Get

I/O Produced Size

USINT

016

Read only

24

Get

I/O Consumed Size

USINT

08

Read only

30

Get

DeviceNet Voltage

UINT

50

Get/Set

PNB COS Mask

WORD

55

Get/Set

Prod Assy Word 4

56

Get/Set

57

Chapter E

Description

0=No action; 1=Reset

Read only
00x00FF

Change of state mask for PNBs

UINT

Defines Word 4 of Assy 100

Prod Assy Word 5

UINT

Defines Word 5 of Assy 100

Get/Set

Prod Assy Word 6

UINT

Defines Word 6 of Assy 100

58

Get/Set

Prod Assy Word 7

UINT

Defines Word 7 of Assy 100

65

Get/Set

Status COS Mask 1

UINT

0ffff

66

Get/Set

Status COS Mask 2

UINT

0ffff

67

Get/Set

Trip COS Mask 1

UINT

0ffff

68

Get/Set

Trip COS Mask 2

UINT

0ffff

69

Get/Set

Warning COS Mask 1

UINT

0ffff

70

Get/Set

Warning COS Mask 2

UINT

0ffff

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

263

Chapter E

DeviceNet Information

The following common services are implemented for the DeviceNet Interface
Object:

Service Code

264

Implemented for:

Service Name

Class

Instance

0x0E

No

Yes

Get_Attribute_Single

0x10

No

No

Set_Attribute_Single

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P - April 2012

Rockwell Automation Support


Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products.
At http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support/, you can find technical manuals, a knowledge base of FAQs, technical and
application notes, sample code and links to software service packs, and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the
best use of these tools.
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation, configuration, and troubleshooting, we offer TechConnect
support programs. For more information, contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative,
or visit http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support/.

Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation, review the information that is contained in this manual.
You can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running.
United States or Canada

1.440.646.3434

Outside United States or


Canada

Use the Worldwide Locator at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support/americas/phone_en.html, or contact


your local Rockwell Automation representative.

New Product Satisfaction Return


Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility.
However, if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned, follow these procedures.
United States

Contact your distributor. You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain
one) to your distributor to complete the return process.

Outside United States

Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure.

Documentation Feedback
Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better. If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document,
complete this form, publication RA-DU002, available at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/literature/.

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A.., Kar Plaza Merkezi E Blok Kat:6 34752 erenky, stanbul, Tel: +90 (216) 5698400

Rockwell Automation Publication 825-UM004D-EN-P266November 2012


Supersedes Publication 825-UM004C-EN-P June 2006

Copyright 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.